Toshiba Video Gaming Accessories 6F3B0250 User Manual

6F3B0250

UM-TS01***-E001

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER

USER’S MANUAL

- Basic Hardware and Function -

TOSHIBA CORPORATION

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894_D.0_o4_w1_nl2_oa-_dF_froa_mx:_W2_w0_w8_.S.3_om68_an.0_ua4_ls1_.c5_om- _.W_Ale_{l M}b_a:_nw_uaw_lsw_S._ec_at_ri_ca_hu_Ato_ndm_Da_ot_wio_nn_lo._an_de_.t - Email: info@ctiautomation.net

6F3B0250

CE Marking

The Programmable Controller PROSEC T1 and T1S (hereafter called T1/T1S) complies with the

requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC under the

condition of use according to the instructions described in this manual.

The contents of the conformity are shown below.

Application of

EMC : 89/336/EEC (as amended by 91/263/EEC and 92/31/EEC)

Council Directive

LVD : 72/23/EEC (as amended by 93/68/EEC)

Manufacture’s Name

Address

Toshiba Corporation, Fuchu Works

1, Toshiba-Cho

Fuchu-shi

TOKYO 183

Japan

declares, that the product

Product Name

Programmable Controller , T1 Series

Model Number

TDR116*6S, TAR116*6S, TDR116*3S

TDR128*6S, TAR128*6S, TDR128*3S

TDR140*6S, TAR140*6S, TDR140*3S

TDR140S6S, TAR140S6S, TDR140S3S

conforms to the following Product Specifications:

EMC

Radiated Interference

Mains Interference

Radiated Susceptibility

Conducted RFI Susceptibility

Electrostatic Discharge

Electrical Fast Transient

EN 55011 Group 1 Class A

ENV50140

ENV50141, IEC100-4-6.

IEC1000-4-2

IEC1000-4-4

LVD

EN61131-2:1995

3.10 Dielectric Properties

4. Mechanical Requirements

Supplementary information

(1) Included Handy Programmer THP911A*S.

(2) Included each type of associated input/output unit in a typical configuration.

(3) Product must be installed in accordance with manufacturers instructions

^{Basic Hardware and Function}1

6F3B0250

UL/c-UL Listing

The Programmable Controller PROSEC T1 and T1S (hereafter called T1/T1S) are UL/c-UL listed

as shown below.

UL and c-UL Listing

File Number :

E95637

Product Name :

Product Covered :

Programmable Controller , T1 Series

Main Unit

TDR116*6S, TAR116*6S, TDR116*3S,

TDR128*6S, TAR128*6S, TDR128*3S,

TDR140*6S, TAR140*6S, TDR140*3S,

TDR140S6S, TAR140S6S, TDR140S3S

Option Card

TDI116*BS, TDD116*BS, TDO116*BS,

TAD121*BS, TAD131*BS, TDA121*BS, TDA131*BS,

TFR112*BS

Expansion Unit

TDR132E*S, TAR132E*S

Expansion Rack

TBU152**S, TBU154**S

Peripherals

TRM102**S, TCU111**S, THP911A*S

UL and c-UL Listing For Use in Hazardous Locations

File Number :

E184034

Product Name :

Product Covered :

Programmable Controller , T1 Series

Main Unit

TDR116*6S, TAR116*6S, TDR116*3S,

TDR128*6S, TAR128*6S, TDR128*3S,

TDR140*6S, TAR140*6S, TDR140*3S,

Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D

Locations Class :

Important Notice :

1. THIS EQUIPMENT IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I,

DIVISION 2, GROUPS A, B, C, D OR NON-HAZARDOUS

LOCATIONS ONLY.

2. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - SUBSTITUTION OF

COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I,

DIVISION 2.

3. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO NOT DISCONNECT

EQUIPMENT UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF

OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS.

2 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

Safety Precautions

This manual is prepared for users of Toshiba’s Programmable Controller T1/T1S.

Read this manual thoroughly before using the T1/T1S. Also, keep this manual and related manuals

so that you can read them anytime while the T1/T1S is in operation.

General Information

1. The T1/T1S has been designed and manufactured for use in an industrial environment.

However, the T1/T1S is not intended to be used for systems which may endanger human

life. Consult Toshiba if you intend to use the T1/T1S for a special application, such as

transportation machines, medical apparatus, aviation and space systems, nuclear

controls, submarine systems, etc.

2. The T1/T1S has been manufactured under strict quality control. However, to keep safety

of overall automated system, fail-safe systems should be considered outside the T1/T1S.

3. In installation, wiring, operation and maintenance of the T1/T1S, it is assumed that the

users have general knowledge of industrial electric control systems.

If this product is handled or operated improperly, electrical shock, fire or damage to this

product could result.

4. This manual has been written for users who are familiar with Programmable Controllers

and industrial control equipment. Contact Toshiba if you have any questions about this

manual.

5. Sample programs and circuits described in this manual are provided for explaining the

operations and applications of the T1/T1S. You should test completely if you use them as

a part of your application system.

Hazard Classifications

In this manual, the following two hazard classifications are used to explain the safety

precautions.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

CAUTION

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may

result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert

against unsafe practices.

Even a precaution is classified as CAUTION, it may cause serious results depending on the

situation. Observe all the safety precautions described on this manual.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}3

6F3B0250

Safety Precautions

Installation:

CAUTION

1. Excess temperature, humidity, vibration, shocks, or dusty and corrosive gas

environment can cause electrical shock, fire or malfunction. Install and use the T1/T1S

and related equipment in the environment described in this manual.

2. Improper installation directions or insufficient installation can cause fire or the units to

drop. Install the T1/T1S and related equipment in accordance with the instructions

described in this manual.

3. Turn off power before installing or removing any units, modules, racks or terminal

blocks. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage to the T1/T1S and

related equipment.

4. Entering wire scraps or other foreign debris into to the T1/T1S and related equipment

can cause fire or malfunction. Pay attention to prevent entering them into the T1/T1S

and related equipment during installation and wiring.

5. Turn off power immediately if the T1/T1S or related equipment is emitting smoke or

odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire or electrical shock. Also

unauthorized repairing will cause fire or serious accidents. Do not attempt to repair.

Contact Toshiba for repairing.

Wiring:

CAUTION

1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.

2. Exposed conductive parts of wire can cause electrical shock. Use crimp-style terminals

with insulating sheath or insulating tape to cover the conductive parts. Also close the

terminal covers securely on the terminal blocks when wiring has been completed.

3. Operation without grounding may cause electrical shock or malfunction. Connect the

ground terminal on the T1/T1S to the system ground.

4. Applying excess power voltage to the T1/T1S can cause explosion or fire. Apply power

of the specified ratings described in the manual.

5. Improper wiring can cause fire, electrical shock or malfunction. Observe local

regulations on wiring and grounding.

4 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

Safety Precautions

Operation:

WARNING

1. Configure emergency stop and safety interlocking circuits outside the T1/T1S.

Otherwise, malfunction of the T1/T1S can cause injury or serious accidents.

CAUTION

2. Operate the T1/T1S and the related modules with closing the terminal covers. Keep

hands away from terminals while power on, to avoid the risk of electrical shock.

3. When you attempt to perform force outputs, RUN/HALT controls, etc. during operation,

carefully check for safety.

4. Turn on power to the T1/T1S before turning on power to the loads. Failure to do so may

cause unexpected behavior of the loads.

5. Do not use any modules of the T1/T1S for the purpose other than specified. This can

cause electrical shock or injury.

6. Do not modify the T1/T1S and related equipment in hardware nor software. This can

cause fire, electrical shock or injury.

7. Configure the external circuit so that the external 24 Vdc power required for transistor

output circuits and power to the loads are switched on/off simultaneously.

Also, turn off power to the loads before turning off power to the T1/T1S.

8. Install fuses appropriate to the load current in the external circuits for the outputs.

Failure to do so can cause fire in case of load over-current.

9. Check for proper connections on wires, connectors and modules. Insufficient contact

can cause malfunction or damage to the T1/T1S and related equipment.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}5

6F3B0250

Safety Precautions

Maintenance:

CAUTION

1. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal blocks or wires.

Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage to the T1/T1S and related

equipment.

2. When you remove both input and output terminal blocks with wires for maintenance

purpose, pay attention to prevent inserting them upside down.

3. Do not insert your finger into the expansion rack’s ventilation hole during power on.

This can cause electrical shock.

4. Do not disassemble the T1/T1S because there are hazardous voltage parts inside.

5. Perform daily checks, periodical checks and cleaning to maintain the system in normal

condition and to prevent unnecessary troubles.

6. Check by referring “Troubleshooting” section of this manual when operating

improperly. Contact Toshiba for repairing if the T1/T1S or related equipment is failed.

Toshiba will not guarantee proper operation nor safety for unauthorized repairing.

7. The contact reliability of the output relays will reduce if the switching exceeds the

specified life. Replace the unit or module if exceeded.

6 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

Safety Precautions

Safety Label

The safety label as shown on the right is

attached to the power terminal of the

T1/T1S.

CAUTION

Do not touch terminals

while power on.

Remove the mount paper before wiring.

Hazardous voltage can shock, burn or cause death.

Do not touch terminals while power on.

Read related manual thoroughly for safety.

Stick this seal on unit or near unit.

Peel off the label from the mount paper

and stick it near the power terminals

where it can be readily seen.

Take off this sheet before wiring.

Contact Toshiba if the label is damaged.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}7

6F3B0250

About This Manual

This manual has been prepared for first-time users of Toshiba’s Programmable Controller

T1 and/or T1S to enable a full understanding of the configuration of the equipment, and to

enable the user to obtain the maximum benefits of the equipment.

This manual introduces the T1 and T1S, and explains the system configuration,

specifications, installation and wiring for T1/T1S’s basic hardware. This manual provides

the information for designing T1/T1S user program, such as the internal operation, memory

configuration, I/O allocation and programming instructions. Information for maintenance

and troubleshooting are also provided in this manual.

The specifications of the option cards, expansion units, and I/O modules, and how to use

them, are explained in the separate manual. Read the T1/T1S User’s Manual - Expansion

I/O - when using the option cards, expansion units, and/or I/O modules.

The T1/T1S’s computer link function and T1S’s multi-purpose communication functions are

covered by the separate manual. Read the T1/T1S User’s Manual - Communication

Function - for details.

Inside This Manual

This manual consists of 10 main sections and an appendix.

Section 1 outlines the T1/T1S configuration. To fully understand the T1/T1S, it is important

to read this section carefully. Sections 2, to 4 describe the hardware used in designing

external circuits and panels. Sections 5 to 7 are mainly concerned with software. Section 8

explains the T1/T1S’s special I/O functions. Sections 9 and 10 describe the maintenance

procedure for the T1/T1S, to ensure safe operation and long service life.

Related Manuals

The following related manuals are available for T1/T1S. Besides this manual, read the

following manuals for your better understanding.

T1/T1S User’s Manual - Basic Hardware and Function - (this manual)

T1/T1S User’s Manual - Expansion I/O -

T1/T1S User’s Manual - Communication Function -

T-Series Handy Programmer (HP911) Operation Manual

T-Series Program Development System (T-PDS) User’s Manual

NOTE

Other than the listed above, some T1 related manuals for special I/O modules

and data transmission modules are available. Contact Toshiba for more

information.

8 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

About This Manual

Terminology

The following is a list of abbreviations and acronyms used in this manual.

microsecond

ASCII

AWG

BCC

CCW

CPU

American Standard Code For Information Interchange

American Wire Gage

Block Check Code

Counter-Clockwise

Central Processing Unit

Clockwise

EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory

hexadecimal (when it appears in front of an alphanumeric string)

I/O

Input/Output

LED

LSB

Light Emitting Diode

Least Significant Bit

millisecond

MSB

PWM

RAM

ROM

Vac

Vdc

Most Significant Bit

Pulse Width Modulation

Random Access Memory

Read Only Memory

AC voltage

DC voltage

^{Basic Hardware and Function}9

6F3B0250

Contents

Safety Precautions

About This Manual

..................................................................................

System Configuration .................................................................... 13

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

Introducing the T1 and T1S ................................................................ 14

Features .............................................................................................. 16

System configuration .......................................................................... 19

I/O expansion ...................................................................................... 20

Components ........................................................................................ 22

Basic unit ......................................................................................... 22

Option cards .................................................................................... 28

Expansion rack ................................................................................ 29

I/O modules ..................................................................................... 30

Expansion unit ................................................................................. 31

Options ............................................................................................ 32

Computer link system ........................................................................ 33

T1S communication function .............................................................. 34

Real-time data link system ................................................................. 36

Peripheral tools .................................................................................. 37

1.5

1.5.1

Specifications .................................................................................. 41

General specifications ........................................................................ 42

External dimensions ........................................................................... 43

Functional specifications .................................................................... 46

I/O specifications ................................................................................ 48

T1-16 ............................................................................................... 48

T1-28 ............................................................................................... 52

T1-40/T1-40S .................................................................................. 56

I/O Application Precautions .......................................................... 61

3.1

3.2

Application precautions for input signals ............................................ 62

Application precautions for output signals .......................................... 65

Installation and Wiring ................................................................... 67

Environmental conditions ................................................................... 68

Installing the unit ................................................................................. 69

Wiring terminals .................................................................................. 71

Grounding ........................................................................................... 76

Power supply wiring ............................................................................ 78

I/O wiring ............................................................................................ 80

10 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

Contents

Operating System Overview ......................................................... 81

5.1

5.2

5.3

Operation modes ................................................................................ 82

About the built-in EEPROM ................................................................ 84

Scanning ............................................................................................. 87

Programming Information ............................................................. 91

Devices and registers ......................................................................... 92

Index modification ............................................................................... 104

Real-time clock/calendar .................................................................... 106

I/O allocation ....................................................................................... 107

T1S memory mode setting ................................................................. 109

User program configuration ................................................................ 110

Main program .................................................................................. 112

Sub-program #1 .............................................................................. 113

Timer interrupt program .................................................................. 113

I/O interrupt programs ..................................................................... 114

Subroutines .................................................................................... 115

Programming language ...................................................................... 116

Program execution sequence ............................................................ 117

On-line debug support functions ........................................................ 118

Password protection ........................................................................... 121

Instructions ...................................................................................... 123

7.1

7.2

List of instructions .............................................................................. 124

Instruction specifications .................................................................... 134

Special I/O Functions .................................................................... 267

Special I/O function overview ............................................................. 268

Variable input filter constant .............................................................. 272

High speed counter ............................................................................ 273

Single phase up-counter ................................................................. 273

Single phase speed-counter ............................................................ 275

Quadrature bi-pulse counter ............................................................ 277

Interrupt input function ........................................................................ 280

Analog setting function ....................................................................... 282

Pulse output function .......................................................................... 283

PWM output function .......................................................................... 285

8.7

Maintenance and Checks .............................................................. 287

Precautions during operation ............................................................. 288

Daily checks ........................................................................................ 289

Periodic checks ................................................................................... 290

Maintenance parts ............................................................................... 291

^{Basic Hardware and Function}11

6F3B0250

Contents

10.

Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 293

10.1

10.1.1

Troubleshooting procedure ................................................................ 294

Power supply check ......................................................................... 295

CPU check ....................................................................................... 296

Program check ................................................................................. 296

Input check ....................................................................................... 297

Output check .................................................................................... 298

Environmental problem .................................................................... 299

Self-diagnostic items .......................................................................... 300

Appendix ......................................................................................................... 305

A.1

A.2

List of models and types ..................................................................... 306

Instruction index ................................................................................. 309

12 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

Section 1

System Configuration

1.1 Introducing the T1 and T1S, 14

1.2 Features, 16

1.3 System configuration, 19

1.4 I/O expansion, 20

1.5 Components, 22

1.6 Computer link system, 33

1.7 T1S Communication function, 34

1.8 Real-time data link system, 36

1.9 Peripheral tools, 37

^{Basic Hardware and Function}13

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

1.1 Introducing the T1 and T1S

The T1 Series are compact, block style, high-performance programmable controllers

with a range of 16 to 328 input and output points.

The T1 Series are available in two versions, T1 and T1S. The T1S is an enhanced

version against the standard T1.

The figure below shows the T1 Series line-up. The T1 Series consists of the total 12

types.

T1 Series

T1-16

T1-28

T1-40

T1-40S

T1-MDR16

T1-MAR16

T1-MDR16D

T1-MDR28

T1-MAR28

T1-MDR28D

T1-MDR40

T1-MAR40

T1-MDR40D

T1S

T1-MDR40S

T1-MAR40S

T1-MDR40SD

I/O points:

The T1 Series are available in four models, T1-16, T1-28, T1-40 and T1-40S. Each

model has the following I/O points.

T1-16

T1-28

T1-40

T1-40S

8 points

(6 relay plus

2 slid-state)

14 points

(12 relay plus

2 slid-state)

24 points

16 points

(14 relay plus 2 solid-state)

Input

Output

2 option cards plus

Expansion

1 expansion rack or unit.

Total up to 382 points.

The T1-16 and T1-28 are fixed I/O non-expandable controllers.

The T1-40 and T1-40S, however, provides additional flexibility. They are expandable in

three ways, option cards, expansion rack and expansion unit.

The T1-40/T1-40S can hold two option cards. These are approximately 1/2 the size of a

credit card. Also, the T1-40/T1-40S can be connected to either one expansion rack or

one expansion unit. The expansion rack (2-slot type or 4-slot type) allows the T1-

40/T1-40S to use most T2 series I/O modules. The expansion unit is a fixed I/O unit. It

has 32 I/O points (16 inputs and 16 outputs).

If two 16 points option cards are inserted and the 4-slot expansion rack with four 64

points modules is connected to the T1-40/T1-40S, it can control up to 328 points.

14 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

Memory capacity:

Program memory capacity of the T1 is 2 k steps. And that of the T1S is 8 k steps. Whole

the program and a part of data registers are stored in built-in EEPROM.

T1S

RAM (for execution) and EEPROM (for back-up)

Memory

2 k steps

8 k steps

Program capacity

(4 k mode or 8 k mode)

Auxiliary relay: 1024 points

Auxiliary relay: 4096 points

Data capacity

Timer:

Counter:

64 points

Timer:

Counter:

256 points

Data register: 1024 words

Data register: 4096 words

Program and leading 512 words Program and the user specified

EEPROM back-up

RAM back-up

of Data register

range of Data register (0 to

2048 words)

Capacitor

(6 hours or more at 25°C)

(168 hours or more at 25°C)

Control functions:

In addition to the basic relay ladder functions, the T1/T1S provides functions such as

data operations, arithmetic operations, various functions, etc. Furthermore, its high

speed counter functions, pulse output functions and data communication functions

allow its application to a wide scope of control systems.

Ladder diagram with function block

Basic: 17 types Basic:

T1S

Language

Number of

21 types

Function: 76 types

16 (nesting not allowed)

1.4 ms/contact, 2.3 ms/coil, 4.2 ms/transfer, 6.5 ms/addition

Function: 99 types

256 (up to 3 levels of nesting)

instructions

Subroutines

Execution speed

Real-time clock/

calendar

Yes (year, month, day, week,

hours, minutes, seconds)

RS-232C (programmer port)

RS-232C (programmer port),

RS-485 (multi-purpose)

Communication

Construction:

The T1/T1S is a compact, easy-handling block style programmable controller. The

T1/T1S has all of the features of a block style controller. In addition, the T1-40/T1-40S

has modular expandability. The T1-40/T1-40S provides flexibility into the block style

controller.

Series compatibility:

Programming instructions are upward compatible in the T-Series programmable

controllers. The T1/T1S programs can be used for other models of the T-Series, T2,

T2E, T2N, T3 and T3H. Peripheral tools can also be shared.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}15

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

1.2 Features

Option card support:

The T1-40/T1-40S has two slots for the option card, which is approximately 1/2 the size

of a credit card. The following eight types of the option cards are available.

· 16 points DC input

· 16 points DC output

· 8 DC inputs + 8 DC outputs

· 1 channel analog input (0 to 5 V/0 to 20 mA)

· 1 channel analog input (±10 V)

· 1 channel analog output (0 to 20 mA)

· 1 channel analog output (±10 V)

· Field network TOSLINE-F10 remote

By using the 16 points input and 16 points output cards, the T1-40/T1-40S can control

up to 72 I/O points without enlarging the mounting space.

Built-in high speed counter:

Two single-phase or one quadrature (2-phase) pulses can be counted. The acceptable

pulse rate is up to 5 kHz. (DC input type only)

Built-in analog setting adjusters:

Two analog setting adjusters are provided on the T1/T1S. This allows operators to

adjust time or other control parameters easily using a screwdriver.

High speed processing:

Sophisticated machine control applications require high speed data manipulations. The

T1/T1S is designed to meet these requirements.

· 1.4 ms per contact

· 4.2 ms per 16-bit transfer

· 2.3 ms per coil

· 6.5 ms per 16-bit addition

The T1/T1S also supports interrupt input function (DC input type only). This allows

immediate operation independent of program scan.

High performance software:

The T1 offers 17 basic ladder instructions and 76 function instructions. The T1S offers

21 basic ladder instructions and 99 function instructions.

Subroutines, Interrupt functions, Indirect addressing, For/Next loops, Pre-derivative

real PID, etc. are standard on the T1/T1S. These functions allow the T1/T1S to be

applied to the most demanding control applications.

Battery-less operation:

The T1/T1S has a standard built-in EEPROM, permitting operation without need of a

battery. Also, the variable data can be written into and/or read from the EEPROM,

providing completely maintenance-free back-up operation.

This function is an important feature for OEMs, because it can eliminate the need for

changing the battery every few years. The cost of the battery is also eliminated.

16 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

Pulse output / PWM output:

One point of variable frequency pulses (max. 5 kHz) or variable duty pulses can be

output. These functions can be used to drive a stepping motor or to simulate an analog

output. (DC input type only)

Built-in computer link function:

The T1/T1S’s RS-232C programmer port can accept the computer link protocol (data

read/write). This results in easy connection to a higher level computer, an operator

interface unit, etc.

The parity setting of the programmer port can be selected either odd or none. The none

parity mode is provided especially for telephone modem connection. Using modems,

remote programming/monitoring is available.

Real-time control data link network:

By inserting the TOSLINE-F10 remote card (option card) into the T1-40/T1-40S, high

speed data link network can be established. In this network, upper T-series PLC model

(T2/T2E/T2N or T3/T3H) works as master and up to 16 T1-40/T1-40Ss can be

connected as remote. Each T1-40/T1-40S can exchange data with the master through

1 word input and 1 word output. The transmission speed can be selected either 750

kbps or 250 kbps.

T2 Series I/O module interface:

In addition to the option cards, the T1-40/T1-40S has a interface for connecting the T2

Series I/O modules. Up to four modules can be connected to the T1-40/T1-40S. The

following I/O modules are available.

· 16 points DC input (DI31)

· 32 points DC input (DI32)

· 64 points DC input (DI235)

· 16 points AC input (IN51/IN61)

· 16 points DC output (DO31/DO233P)

· 32 points DC output (DO32)

· 64 points DC output (DO235)

· 12 points AC output (AC61)

· 8 points isolated relay output (RO62) · 12 points relay output (RO61)

· 4 channels analog input

· 2 channels analog output

(AI21/AI22/AI31/AI32)

(AO31/AO22/AO32)

· 1 channel pulse input (PI21)

· Communication interface (CF211)

· 1 axis position control (MC11)

Sampling trace function:

The sampling trace is the function to collect the user specified data every user specified

timing (minimum every scan), and to display the collected data on the programmer

screen in time chart and/or trend graph format. This function is useful for checking the

input signals changing.

The collecting capacities between T1 and T1S are different as follows.

· T1 ..... 1 register - 128 times, or 8 devices - 256 times

· T1S ... 3 registers and 8 devices - 256 times

^{Basic Hardware and Function}17

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

Password protection:

By registering your passwords, four levels of protection is available according to the

security levels required for your application.

Level 4: Reading/writing program and writing data are prohibited

Level 3: Reading/writing program are prohibited

Level 2: Writing program is prohibited

Level 1: No protection (changing passwords is available only in this level)

Two points of solid-state output:

Each model of the T1/T1S has two points of solid-state output (transistors for DC input

type and triacs for AC input type). These solid-state outputs are suitable for frequent

switching application.

Removable terminal blocks:

The T1-28, T1-40 and T1-40S are equipped with removable terminal blocks. This

supports the easy maintenance work.

DIN rail mounting:

The T1/T1S is equipped with brackets for mounting on a standard 35 mm DIN rail. The

T1/T1S can be mounted on a DIN rail as well as screw mounting.

On-line program changes: (T1S only)

When the T1S’s memory mode is set to 4 k steps mode, on-line (in RUN mode)

program changes are available. Furthermore, program writing into the built-in

EEPROM is also available in RUN mode. These functions are useful in program

debugging stage.

Real-time clock/calendar function: (T1S only)

The T1S has the real-time-clock/calendar function (year, month, day, day of the week,

hours, minutes, seconds) that can be used for performing scheduled operations, data

gathering with time stamps, etc. The real-time-clock/calendar data is backed up by

built-in capacitor for power off. The back-up period is more than 7 days at 25 °C.

RS-485 multi-purpose communication port: (T1S only)

The T1S has an RS-485 multi-purpose communication port. Using this port, one of the

following communication modes can be selected.

· Computer link mode: T-series computer link protocol can be used in this mode.

Up to 32 T1Ss can be connected to a master computer. By using this mode,

MMI/SCADA system can be easily configured.

· Data link mode: Two PLCs (any combination of T1S, T2E or T2N) can be directly

linked together. This direct link is inexpensive, easily configured and requires no

special programming.

· Free ASCII mode: User defined ASCII messages can be transmitted and

received through this port. A terminal, printer, bar-code reader, or other serial

ASCII device can be directly connected.

18 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

1.3 System configuration

The following figure shows the T1/T1S system configuration.

Peripheral tool

T1 basic unit

T1-16

IBM-PC compatible

personal computer

T1-28

T1-40

T1-40S

Option cards

T-PDS

software

Handy programmer

HP911A

Expansion unit

Computer link function

Expansion rack

MMI/SCADA

system

T2 I/O modules

2-slot

4-slot

^{Basic Hardware and Function}19

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

1.4 I/O expansion

The I/O points on the T1-16 and T1-28 are not expandable. The T1-40 and T1-40S,

however, provides I/O expandability by using the option cards, expansion rack and

expansion unit.

The T1-40/T1-40S can hold up to two option cards. Also, the T1-40/T1-40S can be

connected to either one expansion rack (2-slot or 4-slot) or one expansion unit. By

using the expansion rack, most of the T2 Series I/O modules can be used with the

T1-40/T1-40S.

· Available option cards

DI116: 16 points DC input

DO116: 16 points DC output

DD116: 8 points DC input + 8 points DC output

AD121: 1 channel analog input (0 to 5V or 0 to 20mA)

AD131: 1 channel analog input (-10 to +10V)

DA121: 1 channel analog output (0 to 20mA)

DA131: 1 channel analog output (-10 to +10V)

FR112: TOSLINE-F10 remote station

· Available expansion racks

BU152: Up to 2 I/O modules can be mounted

BU154: Up to 4 I/O modules can be mounted

· Available expansion units

T1-EDR32: 16 points DC input + 16 points relay output

T1-EAR32: 16 points AC input + 16 points relay output

· Available I/O expansion configuration

Model

T1-16

Unit configuration

I/O points

16 points (8 in / 8 out)

T1-16

T1-28

28 points (14 in / 14 out)

40 points (24 in / 16 out)

56 points (40 in / 16 out)

56 points (32 in / 24 out)

56 points (24 in / 32 out)

72 points (56 in / 16 out)

72 points (48 in / 24 out)

T1-28

T1-40

T1-40S

T1-40(S)

DI116

DD116

DO116

T1-40(S)

DI116

DD116

20 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

· Available I/O expansion configuration (continued)

Model

T1-40

Unit configuration

I/O points

72 points (40 in / 32 out)

T1-40(S)

DI116

DO116

T1-40S

DD116

72 points (32 in / 40 out)

72 points (24 in / 48 out)

72 points (40 in / 32 out)

104 points

T1-40(S)

DD116

DO116

Exp 32

Option cards

(any combinations)

168 points

200 points

(BU152)

T1-40(S)

Option cards

(any combinations)

296 points

328 points

(BU154)

T1-40(S)

Option cards

(any combinations)

NOTE

(1) When the TOSLINE-F10 remote station (FR112) is used, only one

additional option card can be inserted into the T1-40/T1-40S.

(2) In the above table, “Exp 32” means the expansion unit (T1-EDR32 or

T1-EAR32).

(3) In the above table, I/O points of the combinations with an expansion rack

show the maximum points using 64 points I/O modules.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}21

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

1.5 Components

1.5.1 Basic unit

The basic unit is available in four models, the T1-16, T1-28, T1-40 and T1-40S.

And each model is available in three types, depending on the power supply and input

types.

Model

T1-16 T1-MDR16

Type

Power supply

100-240 Vac,

50/60 Hz

100-240 Vac,

50/60 Hz

Input

Output

8 points - dry contact 6 points - relay,

(24 Vdc)

8 points - 120 Vac

2 points - transistor

6 points - relay,

2 points - triac

T1-MAR16

T1-MDR16D 24 Vdc

8 points - 24 Vdc

14 points - 24 Vdc

6 points - relay,

2 points - transistor

12 points - relay,

2 points - transistor

T1-28 T1-MDR28

T1-MAR28

100-240 Vac,

50/60 Hz

100-240 Vac,

50/60 Hz

14 points - 120 Vac 12 points - relay,

2 points - triac

T1-MDR28D 24 Vdc

14 points - 24 Vdc

12 points - relay,

2 points - transistor

14 points - relay,

2 points - transistor

T1-40 T1-MDR40

T1-MAR40

100-240 Vac,

50/60 Hz

24 points -24 Vdc

100-240 Vac,

50/60 Hz

24 points - 120 Vac 14 points - relay,

2 points - triac

T1-MDR40D 24 Vdc

24 points -24 Vdc

14 points - relay,

2 points - transistor

14 points - relay,

2 points - transistor

T1-40S T1-MDR40S

T1-MAR40S

100-240 Vac,

50/60 Hz

24 points -24 Vdc

100-240 Vac,

50/60 Hz

24 points - 120 Vac 14 points - relay,

2 points - triac

T1-MDR40SD 24 Vdc

24 points -24 Vdc

14 points - relay,

2 points - transistor

22 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

¨ T1-16

Input status LEDs

Output status LEDs

Power supply and

Input terminals

Mounting hole

Programmer port cover

PROSEC

TOSHIBA

MDR16

OUT

Output terminals

Operation status LEDs

¨ T1-28

Input status LEDs

Output status LEDs

Power supply and

Input terminals

Mounting

hole

Programmer

port cover

PROSEC

TOSHIBA

MDR28

OUT

Output terminals

Operation status LEDs

^{Basic Hardware and Function}23

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

¨ T1-40

Power supply and

Input terminals

Input status LEDs

Mounting

hole

Option card

slot

PROSEC

Programmer

TOSHIBA

MDR40

port cover

Expansion

connector

OUT

Output terminals

Operation status LEDs

Output status LEDs

¨ T1-40S

Power supply and

Input terminals

Input status LEDs

Mounting

hole

Option card

slot

PROSEC

Programmer

TOSHIBA

MDR40S

OUT

port cover

Expansion

connector

RS-485 port (terminals)

Operation status LEDs

Output status LEDs

Output terminals

24 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

¨ Behind the programmer port cover

Analog setting adjusters

(V0 and V1)

Mode control switch

(HALT / RUN)

H / R

PRG

Programmer port

connector

PRG

T1-16 / T1-28

T1-40 / T1-40S

Power supply terminals:

Connect the power cable and grounding wire. The terminal screw size is M3.5.

See sections 4.4 and 4.5 for wiring.

Input terminals:

Connect input signal wires. The terminal screw size is M3.5. See section 2.4 for details.

Output terminals:

Connect output signal wires. The terminal screw size is M3.5. See section 2.4 for

details.

Input status LEDs:

Indicate the ON status of each input signal. (color: red)

Output status LEDs:

Indicate the ON status of each output signal. (color: red)

^{Basic Hardware and Function}25

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

Operation status LEDs:

Indicate the operation status of the T1/T1S.

PWR

RUN

FLT

PWR

RUN

FLT

AUX

T1-16 / T1-28

Lit

(Power) (green) Not lit

Lit

T1-40 / T1-40S

PWR

Internal 5 Vdc power is normal.

Internal 5 Vdc power is not normal.

RUN mode (in operation)

HOLD mode

RUN

(green) Blinking

Not lit

HALT mode or ERROR mode

ERROR mode

Hardware error (programmer cannot be connected)

Normal

FLT

(Fault)

Lit

(red) Blinking

Not lit

AUX

(Auxiliary) (red)

Can be controlled by user program. Lit when S320 is

ON and unlit when S320 is OFF. (T1-40/T1-40S)

Mode control switch:

Controls the operation modes of the T1/T1S.

H (HALT)

R (RUN)

When the switch is turned to H (HALT) side, the T1/T1S stops

program execution (HALT mode). In this position, RUN/HALT

command from the programmer is disabled. In case of the T1,

programming is available only in the HALT mode.

When the switch is turned to R (RUN) side, the T1/T1S starts program

execution. This is the position during normal operation.

In this position, RUN/HALT command from the programmer is also

available.

Analog setting adjusters:

Two analog setting adjusters are provided. The V0 value is stored in SW30 and the V1

value is stored in SW31. The converted value range is 0 to 1000. Refer to section 8.5

for details of the analog setting function.

Programmer port connector:

Used to connect the programmer cable. The interface is RS-232C. This port can also

be used for the computer link function. Refer to section 1.6 for more information about

the computer link function.

26 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

Option card slot (T1-40/T1-40S):

Used to insert the option cards. Two slots are provided. Refer to separate “T1/T1S

Use’s Manual - Expansion I/O -” for details of the option cards.

Expansion connector (T1-40/T1-40S):

Used to connect the expansion rack or expansion unit. Refer to separate “T1/T1S Use’s

Manual - Expansion I/O -” for details of the T2 type I/O modules.

RS-485 port (T1-40S only):

Used to connect a computer (SCADA system), operator interface unit, other T1S, or

many kinds of serial ASCII devices including Toshiba’s Inverter through RS-485

interface. Refer to section 1.7 for more information about the T1S’s RS-485 multi-

purpose communication functions.

Mounting holes:

Used to fix the T1/T1S on a mounting frame by screws. The mounting holes are

provided at two opposite corners.

Use two M4 screws for mounting. See section 4.2 for

installing the unit.

DIN rail bracket:

The DIN rail bracket is provided at the rear for mounting the T1/T1S on a 35 mm DIN

rail. See section 4.2 for installing the unit.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}27

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

1.5.2 Option cards

The T1-40/T1-40S can hold up to two option cards for expanding I/O points, etc.

The following eight types of the option cards are available.

For details of the option cards, refer to the separate manual “T1/T1S User’s Manual -

Expansion I/O -“.

Type

DI116

DO116

DD116

Description

16 points input, 24 Vdc - 5 mA

16 points output, 24 Vdc - 100 mA

8 points input, 24 Vdc - 5 mA

Power supply

Supplied from the

basic unit (5 Vdc)

+ 8 points output, 24 Vdc - 100 mA

1 channel analog input, 0 to 5 V / 0 to 20 mA

1 channel analog input, ±10 V

1 channel analog output, 0 to 20 mA

1 channel analog output, ±10 V

TOSLINE-F10 remote station,

1 word input + 1 word output

AD121

AD131

DA121

DA131

FR112

T1-40

Option card

T1-40S

NOTE

The TOSLINE-F10 remote card (FR112) can be used with other cards.

However two FR112s cannot be used together.

28 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

1.5.3 Expansion rack

The T1-40/T1-40S can be connected to either one expansion rack or one expansion

unit.

The following two types of the expansion racks are available. By using the expansion

rack, T2 Series I/O modules can be used with the T1-40/T1-40S.

For details of the expansion rack, refer to the separate manual “T1/T1S User’s Manual

- Expansion I/O -“.

Type

BU152

BU154

Description

2 slots for I/O modules

4 slots for I/O modules

Power supply

Supplied from the

basic unit

BU152

BU154

Expansion connectors

NOTE

(1) A 0.15 m expansion cable is supplied with the expansion rack.

(2) Internal 5 Vdc power for I/O modules is supplied from the T1-40/T1-40S

basic unit. No power supply module is required on the expansion rack.

(3) Expansion connectors are provided on the both sides. However either one

can be used at a time.

(4) DIN rail bracket is not provided.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}29

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

1.5.4 I/O modules

As listed below, various I/O modules are available for the T1-40/T1-40S, allowing it to

be used for a wide variety of applications. Up to four I/O modules can be used with the

T1-40/T1-40S by connecting the expansion rack.

For details of the I/O modules, refer to the separate manual “T1/T1S User’s Manual -

Expansion I/O -“.

Type

DI31

DI32

DI235

IN51

IN61

Name

DC/AC input

DC input

Specifications

16 points (16 points/common), 12 to 24 Vdc/Vac

32 points (4 ´ 8 points/common), 24 Vdc

64 points (8 ´ 8 points/common), 24 Vdc

16 points (16 points/common), 100 to 120 Vac

16 points (16 points/common), 200 to 240 Vac

12 points (3 ´ 4 points/common),

AC input

RO61

Relay output

240 Vac/24 Vdc (max.), 2 A/point, 4 A/common (max.)

8 points (isolated), 240 Vac/24 Vdc (max.),

2 A/point (max.)

16 points (16 points/common), 5 to 24 Vdc,

1 A/point, 1.2 A/4 points (max.)

32 points (4 ´ 8 points/common), 5 to 24 Vdc,

0.1 A/point (max.)

64 points (8 ´ 8 points/common), 5 to 24 Vdc,

0.1 A/point (max.)

RO62

DO31

DO32

DO235

Transistor

output

(current sink)

DO233P Transistor

output

16 points (16 points/common), 5 to 24 Vdc,

1 A/point, 1.2 A/4 points (max.)

(current source)

AC61

Triac output

12 points (3 ´ 4 points/common), 100 to 240 Vac,

0.5 A/point, 0.6 A/SSR (max.)

AI21

AI22

AI31

AI32

AO31

Analog input

4 channels, 1 to 5 V / 4 to 20 mA, 8-bit resolution

4 channels, 1 to 5 V / 4 to 20 mA, 12-bit resolution

4 channels, 0 to 10 V, 8-bit resolution

4 channels, ±10 V, 12-bit resolution

Analog output

2 channels, 1 to 5 V / 4 to 20 mA / 0 to 10 V,

8-bit resolution

AO22

AO32

PI21

2 channels, 1 to 5 V / 4 to 20 mA, 12-bit resolution

2 channels, ±10 V, 12-bit resolution

1 channel (2-phase and zero marker), 5/12 V,

100 kHz (max.), 24-bit counter

1 axis, 200 kHz (max.), 5 to 24 Vdc, ±999999 pulses

Pulse input

Positioning

MC11

CF211

Communication 1 port of RS-232C, full-duplex, ASCII code,

interface 300 / 600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps

30 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

1.5.5 Expansion unit

The T1-40/T1-40S can be connected to either one expansion rack or one expansion

unit.

The following two types of the expansion units are available. Each expansion unit has

32 points I/O (16 inputs and 16 outputs).

For details of the expansion unit, refer to the separate manual “T1/T1S User’s Manual -

Expansion I/O -“.

Type

Description

Power supply

T1-EDR32

Input: 16 points, 24 Vdc - 7 mA

Supplied from the

Output: 16 points, relay, 240 Vac/24 Vdc (max.) - basic unit (5Vdc)

2 A/point (max.)

T1-EAR32

Input: 16 points, 100 to 120 Vac - 7 mA

Output: 16 points, relay, 240 Vac/24 Vdc (max.) -

2 A/point (max.)

NOTE

(1) A 0.5 m expansion cable is supplied with the expansion unit.

(2) Internal 5 Vdc power for expansion unit is supplied from the T1-40/T1-40S

basic unit.

(3) 24 Vdc power for output relay coils is required externally.

(4) DIN rail bracket is provided.

Power supply and

Input terminals

Input status LEDs

Mounting

hole

PROSEC

TOSHIBA

EDR40

Expansion

connector

OUT

Output terminals

Power LEDs (5V and 24V)

Output status LEDs

^{Basic Hardware and Function}31

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

1.5.6 Options

The following optional items are available.

Item

Type

Description

Programmer port

connector

PT16S

For RS-232C computer link, with 2 m cable

Option card

I/O connector

Expansion cable

PT15S

PT15F

CS1R2

Cable side connector for DI116, Soldering type

DO116, or DD116 Flat cable type

For connecting the expansion rack, 0.15 m length,

(spare parts)

CS1R5B For connecting the expansion unit, 0.5m length,

(spare parts)

Empty slot cover

For covering empty slot on the expansion rack

32 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

1.6 Computer link system

The interface of the T1/T1S’s programmer port is RS-232C. Normally this port is used

to connect the programmer. However, this port can also be used for the computer link

function.

The computer link is a data communication function between computer or operator

interface unit and the T1/T1S. The data in the T1/T1S can be read and written by

creating simple communication program on the computer. The computer link protocol

of the T1/T1S is published in “T1/T1S User’s Manual - Communication Function -”.

Item

Specifications

Conforms to RS-232C

Interface

Transmission system

Synchronization

Transmission speed

Transmission distance

Framing

Half-duplex

Start-stop system (asynchronous)

9600 bps (fixed)

15 m max.

Start bit:

Data bits:

Parity:

1 bit

8 bits (fixed)

Odd or none

1 bit (fixed)

Stop bit:

Protocol

T-series computer link (ASCII)

Programmer (binary)

Transmission delay option 0 to 300 ms

By using the multi-drop adapter (CU111), multiple T1/T1Ss can be connected on an

RS-485 line. The T-series PLC programming software (T-PDS) can also be used in this

configuration.

Master Computer

Operator Interface

RS-232C

RS-485 (1 km max.)

Max. 32 T1s

NOTE

In case of the T1, there are functional limitations as follows.

· Multi-drop configuration is available with version 1.10 or later.

· Programmer connection in the multi-drop configuration, none parity and

transmission delay options are available with version 1.20 or later.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}33

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

1.7 T1S communication function

The T1S has an RS-485 muiti-purpose communication port. This port can work

independent of the programmer port.

By using this communication port, one of the following three communication modes is

available, computer link mode, data link mode and free ASCII mode.

For details of these functions, refer to the separate manual “T1/T1S User’s Manual -

Communication Function -”.

Item

Computer link

Conforms to RS-458 (4-wire or 2-wire)

Half-duplex

Free ASCII

Data link

Interface

Transmission system

Synchronization

Start-stop system (asynchronous)

Transmission code

Transmission speed

ASCII/binary

ASCII

Binary

300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200 bps (fixed)

19200 bps

Transmission distance 1 km max.

Framing

Start bit:

Data bits: 7 or 8 bits

Parity:

Stop bit:

T-series

computer link

(ASCII),

Programmer

(binary)

1 bit

Special

Odd, even, or none

1 or 2 bits

Protocol

User defined

ASCII messages

Link configuration

Transmission delay

option

1-to-N

0 to 300 ms

N/A

1-to-1

N/A

Computer link mode

T-series computer link protocol can be used in this mode. A maximum of 32 T1Ss can

be connected to a master computer.

By using this mode, all the T1S’s data can be accessed by a master computer.

The T-series PLC programming software (T-PDS) can also be used in this

configuration.

Master Computer

RS-485 (1 km max.)

Max. 32 T1Ss

34 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

Data link mode

Two PLCs (any combination of T1S, T2E or T2N) can be directly linked together. This

direct link is inexpensive, easily configured and requires no special programming. Data

registers D0000 to D0031 are used for the data transfer.

T1S

RS-485 (1 km max.)

Station No. 1

D0000

Station No. 2

D0000

D0015

D0016

D0015

D0016

D0031

Free ASCII mode

User defined ASCII messages can be transmitted and received through this port.

A terminal, printer, bar-code reader, or other serial ASCII device can be directly

connected. This mode also allows the T1S to communicate with other PLCs (T1, T2E,

T2N, etc.), Toshiba’s Inverters (such as VF-S7/A5, G3), Toshiba’s motor protection

relay (S2E21), or others.

T1S

RS-485 (1 km max.)

Bar-code reader,

Printer, etc.

Inverter VF-S7

Motor Protection Relay

S2E21

^{Basic Hardware and Function}35

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

1.8 Real-time data link system

TOSLINE-F10

TOSLINE-F10 is a high speed data transmission system suited for small points I/O

distribution system. By inserting the TOSLINE-F10 remote card (FR112) into the T1-

40/T1-40S, the T1-40/T1-40S can work as a remote station of the TOSLINE-F10

network. On this network, the T1-40/T1-40S sends 1 word data to the master station

and receives 1 word data from the master station.

Item

TOSLINE-F10 system specifications

High speed mode Long distance mode

Bus (terminated at both ends)

Topology

Transmission distance

(without repeater)

Transmission speed

Scan transmission

capacity

500 m max. (total)

1 km max. (total)

750 kbps

512 points (32 words) max.

250 kbps

Scan cycle

Error checking

7 ms/32 words

CRC check

12 ms/32 words

NOTE

(1) Refer to the separate “T1 User’s Manual - Option Card and I/O

Module -“ for details of the TOSLINE-F10 remote card (FR112).

(2) Refer to the separate TOSLINE-F10 User’s Manual for details of overall

TOSLINE-F10 system.

Typical data link configuration

The figure below shows the typical data link configuration.

Master

computer

T2E

(master)

TOSLINE-F10

T2E

(remote)

T1-40(S)

RI/O

RI/O: remote I/O

Operator interface units

36 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

1.9 Peripheral tools

The following peripheral tools are available for the T1/T1S.

T-Series Program Development System (T-PDS)

The T-Series Program Development System (T-PDS) is a software which runs on any

IBM-PC compatible personal computers such as Toshiba’s Notebook computers. The

same T-PDS software supports on-line/off-line programming, debugging and program

documentation for all the T-Series programmable controllers T1/T1S, T2/T2E/T2N and

T3/T3H.

· User-friendly program editor includes cut & paste, address search & replace,

program block move/copy, etc.

· Group programming - part program development by multiple designers and

merging them into a complete program - enhance the software productivity.

· Powerful monitoring, I/O force and data set functions fully support your program

debugging.

· Documentation of programs with commentary makes your maintenance work easy.

· Remote monitoring/programming via modem (radio/phone) is possible.

The table below shows the T-PDS versions that support the T1/T1S.

Type

Part number

Versions available for

T1 T1S

*1)

T-PDS for Windows TMW33E1SS

T-PDS for MS-DOS TMM33I1SS

Ver 1.0 or later

Ver 1.61 or later

Ver 1.2 or later

Ver 2.1 or later

*1)

*1) The T1S can be used with these versions. However, in this case, there are the

following functional limitations.

· The program size setting is only available as 2 k. It is set to 4 k mode in the T1S.

· Some of the added instructions (MAVE, DFL, HTOA, ATOH) may not be

edited/monitored. (depending on the version)

NOTE

The connection cable for the T1 Series is different from that for upper T-Series

PLCs. These cables are supplied separately.

Connection cable for T1/T1S ... Type: CJ105, 5 m length

Connection cable for T2/T3 ¼. Type: CJ905, 5 m length

^{Basic Hardware and Function}37

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

T-Series Handy Programmer (HP911A)

The HP911A is a hand-held programmer, that can be used to program the T1/T1S

using ladder diagram. Its portability makes it ideal for maintenance use at remote

locations.

The HP911A has the following features.

· The HP911A supports ladder diagram programming of T-Series programmable

controllers T1/T1S, T2/T2E/T2N and T3.

· Built-in EEPROM allows program copy between T-Series controllers.

· Two display modes are available,

- Normal: 5 lines and 12 columns

- Zoom: Full device description

· On-line data set and I/O force are useful for system checking.

· Backlit LCD display allows operation in dim light.

There are two types of the Handy Programmer (HP911) depending on the cable

included with.

Type

HP911A

HP911

Part number

THP911A*S

THP911**S

Cable included with

2 m cable for T1/T1S

2 m cable for the upper Ver 1.1 or later

T-series PLCs

Versions available for T1/T1S

Ver 1.1 or later

The T1S can be used with the HP911(A). However, there are the following functional

limitations.

· The program size setting is only available as 2 k. It is set to 4 k mode in the T1S.

· Some of the added instructions (MAVE, DFL, HTOA, ATOH) cannot be

edited/monitored.

NOTE

A 2 m connection cable for the T1/T1S (Type: CJ102) is supplied with the

HP911A. The cable for the T2/T3 is available separately. (Type: CJ902, 2 m

length)

38 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

1. System Configuration

Program Storage Module (RM102)

The program storage module (RM102) is an

external memory for storing the T1/T1S

program. By using the RM102, program saving

from the T1/T1S to the RM102, and program

loading from the RM102 to the T1/T1S can be

done without need of a programmer.

Because the RM102 has an EEPROM,

maintenance-free program storage and quick

saving/loading are available.

Multi-drop adapter (CU111)

The T1/T1S’s RS-232C programmer port

supports the computer link function.

When two or more T1/T1Ss are connected with

a master computer, the multi-drop adapter

(CU111) can be used. (One-to-N configuration)

The CU111 is an RS-232C/RS-485 converter

specially designed for the T1/T1S’s

programmer port.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}39

6F3B0250

40 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

Section 2

Specifications

2.1 General specifications, 42

2.2 External dimensions, 43

2.3 Functional specifications, 46

2.4 I/O specifications, 48

^{Basic Hardware and Function}41

6F3B0250

2. Specifications

2.1 General specifications

Item

T1-16

100 to 240 Vac (+10/-15 %), 50/60 Hz

30 VA or less 38 VA or less 45 VA or less

50 A or less (at 240 Vac, cold start)

T1-28

T1-40

T1-40S

Power supply voltage

Power consumption

Inrush current

24 Vdc output rating

(24 Vdc, ±10%)

0.1 A for

service power signals)

0.2 A (for external devices and/or for input

power for dry

contact inputs

5 Vdc output rating

1 A (for option card and/or

expansion rack/unit)

Power supply voltage

Power consumption

Inrush current

24 Vdc (+20/-15 %)

12 W or less

25 A or less (at 24 Vdc)

18 W or less

5 Vdc output rating

1 A (for option card and/or

expansion rack/unit)

Retentive power interruption 10 ms or less

Insulation resistance

10 MW or more

(between power terminals and ground terminal)

Withstand voltage

1500 Vac - 1 minute

(between power terminals and ground terminal)

0 to 55 °C (operation), -20 to 75 °C (storage)

20 to 90% RH, no condensation

1000 V p-p/1 ms, Conform to EMC Directive 89/336/EEC

16.7 Hz - 3 mm p-p (3 mutually perpendicular axes)

98 m/s²(10 g)

Ambient temperature

Ambient humidity

Noise immunity

Vibration immunity

Shock immunity

(3 shocks per axis, on 3 mutually perpendicular axes)

Approximate weight

500 g

700 g

800 g

Option card:

Expansion unit: 600 g

50 g

2-slot expansion rack: 600 g

4-slot expansion rack: 800 g

NOTE

(1) 24 Vdc service power output is not provided on the AC input type and DC

power supply type.

(2) 5 Vdc output capacity of T1-40/T1-40S is reduced by 0.2 A with using

HP911A, and by 0.1 A with using RS-485 port.

42 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

2. Specifications

2.2 External dimensions

¨ T1-16

2-Æ5

¨ T1-28

2-Æ5

[mm]

^{Basic Hardware and Function}43

6F3B0250

2. Specifications

¨ T1-40/T1-40S, Expansion unit

2-Æ5

¨ Option card

43.18

Additional space for Option card connector

Card type

DI116, DO116, DD116

AD121, AD131, DA121, DA131

FR112

[mm]

44 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

2. Specifications

¨ 2-slot expansion rack

4-Æ5

69.0

83.0

97.0

106.5

115.0

143.0 (terminal block)

168.0 (connector)

¨ 4-slot expansion rack

4-Æ5

135.0

149.0

163.0

[mm]

^{Basic Hardware and Function}45

6F3B0250

2. Specifications

2.3 Functional specifications

Item

T1-16

T1-28

T1-40

T1-40S

Control method

Scan system

I/O update

Stored program, cyclic scan system

Floating scan or constant scan (10 - 200 ms, 10 ms units)

Batch I/O refresh (direct I/O instruction available)

Program memory

RAM memory back-

RAM (capacitor back-up) and EEPROM (no back-up battery required)

6 hours (25°C)

168 hours (25°C)

Program capacity

2 k steps

8 k steps

(4 k or 8 k mode)

Programming

language

Ladder diagram with function block

Instructions

Basic ladder instructions: 17

Basic: 21

Function block instructions: 76

Function: 99

Execution speed

Program types

1.4 ms/contact, 2.3 ms/coil,

4.2 ms/16-bit transfer, 6.5 ms/16-bit addition

1 main program

1 sub-program (initial program)

1 timer interrupt (interval: 5 to 1000 ms, 5 ms units)

4 I/O interrupt (high-speed counter and interrupt input)

16 subroutines (nesting not available)

256 subroutines

(up to 3 levels of

nesting)

User

data

I/O register 512 points/32 words (X/XW, Y/YW)

Auxiliary

relay

1024 points/64 words (R/RW)

4096 points/

256 words

(R/RW)

Special

relay

1024 points/64 words (S/SW)

Timer

64 points (T./T), 32 @ 0.01 s, 32 @ 0.1 s

256 points (T./T)

64 @ 0.01 s,

192 @ 0.1 s

Counter

Data

64 points (C./C)

1024 words (D)

256 points (C./C)

4096 words (D)

Index

3 words (I, J, K)

I/O capacity

16 points

(fixed)

28 points

(fixed)

40 points (basic)

+ 32 points (option cards)

+ 16 words (I/O modules)

Input

type

DC input

type (Note) (AC PS),

Dry contact input 24 Vdc input

24 Vdc input

(DC PS)

AC input

type

100 - 120 Vac input

Output

type

DC input

type

AC input

type

Relay + transistor (2 points)

Relay + triac (2 points)

I/O terminal block

Fixed

Removable

46 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

2. Specifications

Functional specifications (cont’d)

Item

Real-time clock

/calendar

T1-16

T1-28

T1-40

T1-40S

Yes,

(±30 s/month)

Special I/O functions High speed counter (2 single or 1 quadrature),

(Note)

Interrupt input (2 points),

Adjustable analog register (2 points),

Pulse output (CW+CCW or pulse+direction),

PWM output

Communications

interface

1 port RS-232C (programmer port)

- for Programmer or Computer link connection

1 port RS-485

- Programmer

- Computer link

- Data link

- Free ASCII

TOSLINE-F10 remote

(by option card)

Debug support

function

Sampling trace

(8 devices - 256 times or 1 register - 128 times)

Sampling trace

(8 devices and

3 register - 256

times)

On-line

programming

On-line

EEPROM write

NOTE

(1) The input specification of the T1-16 (AC power type) is dry contact input,

which supplies the power for input signals (24 Vdc) from the unit.

Other types are DC input, which requires external power for input signals.

(2) High speed counter, interrupt input, pulse output and PWM output are

available in the DC input types.

(3) High speed counter and interrupt input cannot be used simultaneously.

(4) Pulse output and PWM output cannot be used simultaneously.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}47

6F3B0250

2. Specifications

2.4 I/O specifications

2.4.1 T1-16

· T1-16 input specifications

Item

Specifications

DC input type

AC power type DC power type

Dry contact input, DC input,

current source or current source or

sink ^*1sink ^*2

8 points (8 points/common)

AC input type

Input type

AC input

Number of input

points

8 points (8 points/common)

Rated input voltage Supplied from

T1-16

24 Vdc,

+10/-15%

100 - 120 Vac, +10/-15 %,

50/60 Hz

(24 Vdc, ±10 %)

Rated input current 7 mA (at 24 Vdc)

7 mA (at 100 Vac)

ON level

Contact close

(max. 1.2 kW)

Contact open

(min. 20 kW)

Min. ON

voltage: 15 Vdc

Min. OFF

voltage: 5 Vdc

Min. ON voltage: 80 Vac

OFF level

Max. OFF voltage: 30 Vac

ON delay time

OFF delay time

0 to 15 ms

25 ms or less + user setting ^*4

30 ms or less + user setting ^*4

0 to 15 ms

Input signal display LED display for all points, lit at ON, internal logic side

External connection Terminal block (fixed), M3.5

Withstand voltage 1500 Vac, 1 minute (between internal and external circuits)

Internal circuit

LED

*1, *2

24 Vdc

(AC power type only)

*1: The input current direction (source or sink) of the dry contact input can be selected by the

internal jumper plug. (Factory setting = current source) Refer to section 3.1.

3 side: current flows from input terminal to (-) terminal (current source)

1 side: current flows from (+) terminal to input terminal (current sink)

*2: The jumper plug of the DC power supply type must be set to 1 side.

*3: The input ON/OFF delay time of the DC input type can be changed by user. The setting range is

0 to 15 ms. (Default value = 10 ms) Refer to section 8.2.

*4: The input ON/OFF delay time of the AC input can be extended by user. The extension setting

range is 0 to 15 ms. (Default value = 10 ms) Resulting the default delay times are 35 ms (ON

delay) and 40 ms (OFF delay). Refer to section 8.2.

48 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

2. Specifications

· Input signal connections

< DC input (AC power) type >

Current source

Current sink

Current

flow

Current flow

0 2 4 6

1 3 5 7

T1-16

Vin

21 23 25 27

OUT

Vin

21 23 25 27

OUT

C0 20 22 24 26 C1

Note) The factory setting is current source.

< DC input (DC power) type >

< AC input type >

100 - 120 Vac input

24 Vdc input

24Vdc

100 - 120 Vac

0 2 4 6

- C 1 3 5 7

N C 1 3 5 7

T1-16

NC NC

21 23 25 27

OUT

C0 21 23 25 27

OUT

C0 20 22 24 26 C1

C0 20 22 24 26

Note) 24 Vdc service power output is not provided

on the DC power supply type.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}49

6F3B0250

2. Specifications

· T1-16 output specifications

Item

Specifications

Transistor output

(DC input type)

Relay output

(both DC input and

AC input types)

Relay contact,

Triac output

(AC input type)

Output type

Transistor output,

current sink

Triac output

normally open

Number of output points 6 points

(6 points/common)

2 points

(2 points/common)

2 points

(2 points/common)

100 - 240 Vac

(50/60 Hz)

24 - 264 Vac

(47 - 63 Hz)

1.0 A/point

(resistive)

Rated load voltage

240 Vac/24 Vdc (max.) 24 Vdc

Range of load voltage

Max. 264 Vac/125Vdc 20.0 - 28.0 V

Maximum load current 2 A/point (resistive),

4 A/common

0.5 A/point

(resistive)

ON resistance

50 mW or less

(initial value)

Voltage drop at ON

1.5 V or less

Leakage current at OFF None

0.1 mA or less

1 mA or less

(at 100 Vac, 50 Hz),

2 mA or less

(at 240 Vac, 50 Hz)

100mA (24 Vac),

50mA (100 - 240 Vac)

1 ms or less

1 ms + 1/2 cycle or

less

Minimum load

5 Vdc, 10 mA

(50 mW)

10 ms or less

ON delay time

OFF delay time

0.1 ms or less

Input signal display

External connection

Withstand voltage

Internal circuit

LED display for all points, lit at ON, internal logic side

Terminal block (fixed), M3.5

1500 Vac, 1 minute (between internal and external circuits)

LED

Vin

*1: The switching life of the relay output is as follows.

20 million times or more (mechanical)

100 thousand times or more (electrical, at maximum rated voltage and current)

50 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

2. Specifications

· Output signal connections

< DC input type - 6 relays and 2 transistors >

0 2 4 6

1 3 5 7

T1-16

Note) 24 Vdc service power output is

not provided on the DC power

supply type.

OUT

Vin

21 23 25 27

C0 20 22 24 26 C1

24 Vdc

240 Vac/24 Vdc (max.)

Relay outputs

Transistor

outputs

< AC input type - 6 relays and 2 triacs >

0 2 4 6

N C 1 3 5 7

T1-16

OUT

NC C0 21 23 25 27

C0 20 22 24 26 C1

100 - 240 Vac

240 Vac/24 Vdc (max.)

Relay outputs

Triac

outputs

^{Basic Hardware and Function}51

6F3B0250

2. Specifications

2.4.2 T1-28

· T1-28 input specifications

Item

Specifications

AC input

DC input type

AC input type

Input type

DC input,

current source/sink

Number of input points 14 points (14 points/common)

14 points (14 points/common)

100 - 120 Vac, +10/-15 %,

50/60 Hz

Rated input voltage

24 Vdc, +10/-15 %

Rated input current

Min. ON voltage

Max. OFF voltage

ON delay time

7 mA (at 24 Vdc)

15 Vdc

7 mA (at 100 Vac)

80 Vac

30 Vac

5 Vdc

0 to 15 ms (X00 - X07) ^*1

10 ms or less (X08 - X0D)

25 ms or less + user setting

(X00 - X07)^*2

25 ms or less (X08 - X0D)

30 ms or less + user setting

(X00 - X07) ^*2

OFF delay time

0 to 15 ms (X00 - X07) ^*1

10 ms (X08 - X0D)

30 ms or less (X08 - X0D)

Input signal display

External connection

Withstand voltage

Internal circuit

LED display for all points, lit at ON, internal logic side

Removable terminal block, M3.5

1500 Vac, 1 minute (between internal and external circuits)

LED

*1: The input ON/OFF delay time of the leading 8 points of the DC input can be changed by user.

The setting range is 0 to 15 ms. (Default value = 10 ms) Refer to section 8.2.

*2: The input ON/OFF delay time of the leading 8 points of the AC input can be extended by user.

The extension setting range is 0 to 15 ms. (Default value = 10 ms) Resulting the default delay

times of these points are 35 ms (ON delay) and 40 ms (OFF delay). Refer to section 8.2.

52 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

2. Specifications

· Input signal connections

< DC input type >

24 Vdc input

24 Vdc

service power

C 1 3 5 7 9 B D

+ 0 2 4 6 8 A C

T1-28

OUT

Vin

21 23 24 26 C2 28 2A 2C C3

C0 20 22 C1 25 27 C2 29 2B 2D C3

Note) The 24 Vdc service power output is not provided on the DC power supply type.

< AC input type >

100 - 120 Vac input

100 - 120 Vac

C 1 3 5 7 9 B D

NC NC

0 2 4 6 8 A C

T1-28

OUT

C0 21 23 24 26 C2 28 2A 2C C3

C0 20 22 C1 25 27 C2 29 2B 2D C3

^{Basic Hardware and Function}53

6F3B0250

2. Specifications

· T1-28 output specifications

Item

Specifications

Transistor output

(DC input type)

Relay output

(both DC input and

AC input types)

Relay contact,

Triac output

(AC input type)

Output type

Transistor output,

current sink

Triac output

normally open

Number of output points 12 points

(1 ´ 2 pts/common,

2 points

(2 points/common)

2 points

(2 points/common)

1 ´ 4 pts/common,

1 ´ 6 pts/common)

240 Vac/24 Vdc (max.) 24 Vdc

Rated load voltage

100 - 240 Vac

(50/60 Hz)

Range of load voltage

Max. 264 Vac/125Vdc 20.0 - 28.0 V

24 - 264 Vac

(47 - 63 Hz)

Maximum load current 2 A/point (resistive),

4 A/common

0.5 A/point (resistive) 1.0 A/point

(resistive)

ON resistance

50 mW or less

(initial value)

Voltage drop at ON

1.5 V or less

1.5V or less

Leakage current at OFF None

0.1 mA or less

1 mA or less

(at 100 Vac, 50Hz),

2 mA or less

(at 240 Vac, 50Hz)

100 mA (24 Vac),

50 mA (100 - 240 Vac)

1 ms or less

1 ms + 1/2 cycle or

less

Minimum load

5 Vdc, 10 mA

(50 mW)

10 ms or less

ON delay time

OFF delay time

0.1 ms or less

Output signal display

External connection

Withstand voltage

Internal circuit

LED display for all points, lit at ON, internal logic side

Removable terminal block, M3.5

1500 Vac, 1 minute (between internal and external circuits)

LED

Vin

*1: The switching life of the relay output is as follows.

20 million times or more (mechanical)

100 thousand times or more (electrical, at maximum rated voltage and current)

54 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

2. Specifications

· Output signal connections

< DC input type - 12 relays and 2 transistors >

C 1 3 5 7 9 B D

+ 0 2 4 6 8 A C

T1-28

OUT

Vin

21 23 24 26 C2 28 2A 2C C3

C0 20 22 C1 25 27 C2 29 2B 2D C3

240 Vac/24 Vdc (max.)

24 Vdc

Transistor

outputs

Relay outputs

< AC input type - 12 relays and 2 triacs >

C 1 3 5 7 9 B D

NC NC

0 2 4 6 8 A C

T1-28

OUT

C0 21 23 24 26 C2 28 2A 2C C3

C0 20 22 C1 25 27 C2 29 2B 2D C3

240 Vac/24 Vdc (max.)

100 - 240 Vac

Triac

outputs

Relay outputs

^{Basic Hardware and Function}55

6F3B0250

2. Specifications

2.4.3 T1-40/T1-40S

· T1-40/T1-40S input specifications

Item

Specifications

AC input

DC input type

AC input type

Input type

DC input,

current source/sink

Number of input points 24 points (24 points/common)

24 points (24 points/common)

100 - 120 Vac, +10/-15 %,

50/60 Hz

Rated input voltage

24 Vdc, +10/-15 %

Rated input current

Min. ON voltage

Max. OFF voltage

ON delay time

7 mA (at 24 Vdc)

15 Vdc

7 mA (at 100 Vac)

80 Vac

30 Vac

5 Vdc

0 to 15 ms (X00 - X07) ^*1

10 ms (X08 - X17)

25 ms or less + user setting

(X00 - X07) ^*2

25 ms or less (X08 - X17)

30 ms or less + user setting

(X00 - X07) ^*2

OFF delay time

0 to 15 ms (X00 - X07) ^*1

10 ms (X08 - X17)

30 ms or less (X08 - X17)

Input signal display

External connection

Withstand voltage

Internal circuit

LED display for all points, lit at ON, internal logic side

Removable terminal block, M3.5

1500 Vac, 1 minute (between internal and external circuits)

LED

*1: The input ON/OFF delay time of the leading 8 points of the DC input can be changed by user.

The setting range is 0 to 15 ms. (Default value = 10 ms) Refer to section 8.2.

*2: The input ON/OFF delay time of the leading 8 points of the AC input can be extended by user.

The extension setting range is 0 to 15 ms. (Default value = 10 ms) Resulting the default delay

times of these points are 35 ms (ON delay) and 40 ms (OFF delay). Refer to section 8.2.

56 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

2. Specifications

· Input signal connections

< DC input type >

24 Vdc input

24 Vdc

service power

C 1 3 5 7 9 B D F 11 13 15 17

+ 0 2 4 6 8 A C E 10 12 14 16

T1-40

OUT

NC NC Vin

20 22 23 24 25 26 27 C1 29 2B 2C 2E

NC NC NC

C0 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2A C2 2D 2F

Note) The 24 Vdc service power output is not provided on the DC power supply type.

< AC input type >

100 - 120 Vac input

100 - 120 Vac

C 1 3 5 7 9 B D F 11 13 15 17

NC NC

0 2 4 6 8 A C E 10 12 14 16

T1-40

OUT

NC NC

C0 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 C1 29 2B 2C 2E

NC NC NC

C0 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2A C2 2D 2F

^{Basic Hardware and Function}57

6F3B0250

2. Specifications

· T1-40/T1-40S output specifications

Item

Specifications

Transistor output

(DC input type)

Relay output

(both DC input and

AC input types)

Relay contact,

Triac output

(AC input type)

Output type

Transistor output,

current sink

Triac output

normally open

Number of output points 14 points

(6 ´ isolated,

2 ´ 4 pts/common)

2 points

(2 points/common)

2 points

(2 points/common)

Rated load voltage

240 Vac/24 Vdc (max.) 24 Vdc

100 - 240 Vac

(50/60 Hz)

Range of load voltage

Max. 264 Vac/125Vdc 20.0 - 28.0 V

24 - 264 Vac

(47 - 63 Hz)

Maximum load current 2 A/point (resistive),

2 A/common

0.5 A/point (resistive) 1.0 A/point

(resistive)

ON resistance

50 mW or less

(initial value)

Voltage drop at ON

1.5 V or less

Leakage current at OFF None

0.1 mA or less

1 mA or less

(at 100 Vac, 50Hz)

2 mA or less

(at 240 Vac, 50Hz)

100 mA (24 Vac),

50 mA (100 - 240 Vac)

1 ms or less

1 ms + 1/2 cycle or

less

Minimum load

5 Vdc, 10 mA

(50 mW)

10 ms or less

ON delay time

OFF delay time

0.1 ms or less

Input signal display

External connection

Withstand voltage

Internal circuit

LED display for all points, lit at ON, internal logic side

Removable terminal block, M3.5

1500 Vac, 1 minute (between internal and external circuits)

LED

Vin

*1: The switching life of the relay output is as follows.

20 million times or more (mechanical)

100 thousand times or more (electrical, at maximum rated voltage and current)

58 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

2. Specifications

· Output signal connections

< DC input type - 14 relays and 2 transistors >

C 1 3 5 7 9 B D F 11 13 15 17

+ 0 2 4 6 8 A C E 10 12 14 16

T1-40

OUT

NC NC Vin

20 22 23 24 25 26 27 C1 29 2B 2C 2E

NC NC NC

C0 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2A C2 2D 2F

240 Vac/

24 Vdc (max.)

PS PS PS

PS PS

24 Vdc

Transistor

outputs

Relay outputs

< AC input type - 14 relays and 2 triacs >

C 1 3 5 7 9 B D F 11 13 15 17

NC NC

0 2 4 6 8 A C E 10 12 14 16

T1-40

OUT

NC NC

C0 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 C1 29 2B 2C 2E

NC NC NC

C0 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2A C2 2D 2F

240 Vac/

24 Vdc (max.)

PS PS PS

PS PS

100 - 240 Vac

Triac

outputs

Relay outputs

^{Basic Hardware and Function}59

6F3B0250

60 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

Section 3

I/O Application Precautions

3.1 Application precautions for input signals, 62

3.2 Application precautions for output signals, 65

^{Basic Hardware and Function}61

6F3B0250

3. I/O Application Precautions

3.1 Application precautions for input signals

Configure emergency stop and safety interlocking circuits outside the

T1/T1S. Otherwise, malfunction of the T1/T1S can cause injury or serious

accidents.

WARNING

(1) Current source / sink selection on the T1-16 dry contact input

The input current flow direction (source or sink) of the T1-16 dry contact input can be

selected by setting the jumper plug on the T1-16 printed circuit board as shown below.

The factory setting is current source. Refer to section 2.4.1 for specifications and signal

connections.

CAUTION

(1) Turn off power before

opening the cover.

(2) Take care not to touch

any electrical parts on

the board. Static

The tool for opening the

cover is attached on the

back of the T1-16.

electricity can cause

damage.

(3) Use a pair of tweezers

to change the jumper

plug setting.

Remove the tool from the

unit.

Jumper plug

1 side:

Sink

3 side:

Source

Put the tool on the side of

the unit so that the marks

< on the tool and the unit

are aligned.

Push the tool to unhook

the cover. Then remove

the cover.

62 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

3. I/O Application Precautions

(2) Minimum ON/OFF time of the input signal

The following conditions guarantee correct reading of the ON/OFF state of the input

signal:

Input ON time: ON delay time + the time for one scan

Input OFF time: OFF delay time + the time for one scan

The ON and OFF times of the input signals must be longer than these intervals.

(3) Increasing the contact current

The reliability of some contacts cannot be guaranteed by the specified input current. In

this case, install an external bleeder resistor to increase the contact current.

Bleeder resistor

R =

I₁

input

circuit

I - I

V ²

I₂

Wattage >

Note) The above solution cannot be applied to the T1-16 dry contact input.

(4) Connecting transistor output device

An example of connecting a transistor output device to T1/T1S’s input circuit is shown

below.

· For NPN open collector

input

circuit

input

circuit

T1-16 dry contact input

(current source)

T1-28, T1-40 and T1-40S DC input

· For PNP open collector

input

circuit

input

circuit

T1-16 dry contact input

(current sink)

T1-28, T1-40 and T1-40S DC input

^{Basic Hardware and Function}63

6F3B0250

3. I/O Application Precautions

(5) Countermeasures against leakage current

When a switch with an LED or an AC output sensor is used, the input sometimes cannot

recognize that the switch is off due to the current leakage. In this case, install a bleeder

resistor to reduce input impedance.

LED

Bleeder resistor

input

circuit

output

sensor

input

circuit

DC input type

AC input type

Select a bleeder resistor according to the following criteria:

(a) The voltage between the input terminals must be lower than the OFF voltage

when the sensor is switched off.

(b) The current must be within the allowable range when the sensor is switched on.

sensor is switched on times three.

Note) The above solution cannot be applied to the T1-16 dry contact input.

(6) Countermeasures against induced current

With ac input signals, if the external cable is long or if a multi-core cable is used, an

induced current can flow from the charged wire to the open wire, in proportion to the

capacities of the cables. In this case, sometimes the voltage reaches the level of the ON

input even though the contact is open, causing the input to malfunction for no apparent

reason.

The usual practice when this happens is to reduce input impedance. Install a resistor or a

resistor and capacitor between the input and common terminals, or use shielded cables.

Such precautions are necessary when dealing with a large number of ac input signals.

input

circuit

Open contact

64 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

3. I/O Application Precautions

3.2 Application precautions for output signals

Configure emergency stop and safety interlocking circuits outside the T1/T1S.

Otherwise, malfunction of the T1/T1S can cause injury or serious accidents

WARNING

CAUTION

1. Turn on power to the T1/T1S before turning on power to the loads. Failure

to do so may cause unexpected behavior of the loads.

2. Configure the external circuit so that the external 24 Vdc power required

for the transistor output circuits and power to the loads are switched on/off

simultaneously. Also, turn off power to the loads before turning off power to

the T1/T1S.

3. Install fuses appropriate to the load current in the external circuits for the

outputs. Failure to do so can cause fire in case of load over-current.

(1) 2 points of solid-state output

The leading 2 points of output (Y020 and Y021) are solid-state outputs, transistors on the

DC input types and triacs on the AC input types.

These solid-state outputs are suited for frequent switching applications.

Note that the specifications of the solid-state outputs and other outputs (relays) are

different.

(2) Switching life of output relays

Expected relay life is more than 100,000 electrical cycles at rated maximum voltage and

current, and more than 20 million mechanical cycles. The expected contact life (electrical

cycles) is shown on the table below.

Load voltage Load Expected life

current (thousand)

Load voltage Load Expected life

current (thousand)

AC 110 Vac,

2 A

1 A

0.5 A

2 A

340

720

1,600

150

DC 24 Vdc,

load L/R = 0 ms

2 A

1 A

0.5 A

2 A

280

600

1,300

load

COSf = 1

110 Vac,

24 Vdc,

1 A

0.5 A

2 A

1 A

0.5 A

2 A

320

700

220

500

1,100

100

210

L/R = 15 ms

1 A

0.5 A

1 A

0.5 A

0.2A

0.5 A

0.2 A

0.1 A

150

350

200

420

130

420

200

550

150

350

COSf = 0.7

220 Vac,

COSf = 1

48 Vdc,

L/R = 0 ms

48 Vdc,

L/R = 15 ms

110 Vdc,

L/R = 0 ms

110 Vdc,

220 Vac,

COSf = 0.7

1 A

0.5 A

460

L/R = 15 ms

^{Basic Hardware and Function}65

6F3B0250

3. I/O Application Precautions

(3) Over-current protection

The output circuit of the T1/T1S does not contain protective fuses. Fuses rated for the

output should be provided by the user.

Load

output

circuit

Load

Fuse appropriate to

the common current

(4) Output surge protection

Where an inductive load is connected to the output, a relatively high energy transient

voltage will be generated when the relay turns OFF. To prevent the problems caused by

this surge, install a surge absorber in parallel to the inductive load.

Load

Surge absorber

output

circuit

Surge absorber:

· Flywheel diode (for DC output)

Inverse withstand voltage: At least three times that of the power supply

Forward current: Larger than the load current

· Varistor (for AC output)

The voltage rating is 1.2 times the maximum (peak) voltage of the power supply

· CR snubber (for DC or AC output)

R: 0.5 to 1 W per volt coil voltage

C: 0.5 to 1 mF per ampere of coil current (non-polarity capacitor)

66 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

Section 4

Installation and Wiring

4.1 Environmental conditions, 68

4.2 Installing the unit, 69

4.3 Wiring terminals, 71

4.4 Grounding, 76

4.5 Power supply wiring, 78

4.6 I/O wiring, 80

^{Basic Hardware and Function}67

6F3B0250

4. Installation and Wiring

4.1 Environmental conditions

Excess temperature, humidity, vibration, shocks, or dusty and corrosive gas

CAUTION

environment can cause electrical shock, fire or malfunction.

Install and use the T1/T1S and related equipment in the environment

described in this section.

Do not install the T1/T1S in the following locations:

· Where the ambient temperature drops below 0 °C or exceeds 55 °C.

· Where the relative humidity drops below 20 % or exceeds 90 %.

· Where there is condensation due to sudden temperature changes.

· In locations subject to vibration that exceeds tolerance.

· In locations subject to shock that exceeds tolerance.

· Where there are corrosive or flammable gases.

· In locations subject to dust, machining debris or other particles.

· In locations exposed to direct sunlight.

Observe the following precautions when installing enclosures in which the T1/T1S will be

installed:

· Provide the maximum possible distance from high-voltage or high-power panels. This

distance must be at least 200 mm.

· If installing the enclosures in the vicinity of high-frequency equipment, be sure to

correctly ground the enclosures.

· When sharing the channel base with other panels, check for leakage current from the

other panels or equipment.

68 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

4. Installation and Wiring

4.2 Installing the unit

1. Improper installation directions or insufficient installation can cause fire

or the units to drop. Install the T1/T1S and related equipment in

accordance with the instructions described in this section.

CAUTION

2. Turn off power before installing or removing any units, modules, racks

or terminal blocks. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or

damage to the T1/T1S and related equipment.

3. Entering wire scraps or other foreign debris into to the T1/T1S and

related equipment can cause fire or malfunction. Pay attention to prevent

entering them into the T1 and related equipment during installation and

wiring.

NOTE

The T1/T1S basic unit and the expansion unit come equipped with a bracket at

the rear for mounting on a 35 mm DIN rail. However, no DIN rail bracket is

provided on the expansion rack.

Installation precautions:

· Because the T1/T1S is not dust-proof, install it in a dust-proof enclosure.

· Do not install the unit directly above equipment that generates a large amount of heat,

such as a heater, transformer, or large-capacity resistor.

· Do not install the unit within 200 mm of a high-voltage or high-power cables.

· Allow at least 70 mm on all sides of the unit for ventilation.

· For safely during maintenance and operation, install the unit as far as possible from

high-voltage or power equipment. Alternatively, keep the unit separate using a metal

plate or similar separator.

· If a high-frequency equipment is installed in the enclosure together with the T1/T1S,

special attention is required for grounding. See section 4.4.

· Be sure to install the unit vertically with keeping the power terminals upside. Do not

install the unit horizontally or upside-down for safety reason.

· Use M4 size screws to mount the T1/T1S.

(Recommended torque: 1.47 N×m = 15 kgf×cm)

Upward

Mount the T1 on a vertical panel.

PROSEC

All other mounting positions are not

acceptable.

TOSHIBA

MDR40

OUT

^{Basic Hardware and Function}69

6F3B0250

4. Installation and Wiring

Dimensions for screw mounting:

· T1-16

2 - M4

113 mm

· T1-28 / T1-40 / T1-40S / Expansion unit

2 - M4

158.5 mm

· Expansion rack

2-slot

4-slot

4 - M4

83 mm

4 - M4

149 mm

70 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

4. Installation and Wiring

4.3 Wiring terminals

1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.

CAUTION

2. Exposed conductive parts of wire can cause electrical shock. Use

crimp-style terminals with insulating sheath or insulating tape to cover

the conductive parts. Also close the terminal covers securely on the

terminal blocks when wiring has been completed.

3. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal

blocks or wires. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage

to the T1/T1S and related equipment.

The terminal arrangement of each T1 Series model are shown below.

The terminal screw size is M3.5. Use crimp-style terminals of 7 mm width or less useable

for M3.5.

The terminal blocks of the T1-16 are not removable (fixed). On the other hand, the

terminal blocks of the T1-28, T1-40 and T1-40S are removable. However, be sure to turn

off power before removing or replacing the terminal blocks.

NOTE

For input and output signal connections, refer to sections 2.4 and 3.

· T1-16

T1-MDR16 ... AC power supply, Dry contact input type

0 2 4 6

1 3 5 7

T1-16

OUT

Vin

21 23 25 27

C0 20 22 24 26 C1

^{Basic Hardware and Function}71

6F3B0250

4. Installation and Wiring

T1-MAR16 ... AC power supply, AC input type

0 2 4 6

N C 1 3 5 7

T1-16

OUT

C0 21 23 25 27

C0 20 22 24 26 C1

T1-MDR16D ... DC power supply, DC input type

0 2 4 6

C 1 3 5 7

T1-16

OUT

NC Vin

21 23 25 27

C0 20 22 24 26 C1

NOTE

NC stands for ”no connect”. Do not use the NC terminals for wire relaying or

branching.

72 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

4. Installation and Wiring

· T1-28

T1-MDR28 ... AC power supply, DC input type

C 1 3 5 7 9 B D

+ 0 2 4 6 8 A C

T1-28

OUT

Vin

21 23 24 26 C2 28 2A 2C C3

C0 20 22 C1 25 27 C2 29 2B 2D C3

T1-MAR28 ... AC power supply, AC input type

C 1 3 5 7 9 B D

NC NC

0 2 4 6 8 A C

T1-28

OUT

C0 21 23 24 26 C2 28 2A 2C C3

C0 20 22 C1 25 27 C2 29 2B 2D C3

T1-MDR28D ... DC power supply, DC input type

C 1 3 5 7 9 B D

NC NC

0 2 4 6 8 A C

T1-28

OUT

Vin

21 23 24 26 C2 28 2A 2C C3

C0 20 22 C1 25 27 C2 29 2B 2D C3

NOTE

NC stands for ”no connect”. Do not use the NC terminals for wire relaying or

branching.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}73

6F3B0250

4. Installation and Wiring

· T1-40

T1-MDR40 ... AC power supply, DC input type

C 1 3 5 7 9 B D F 11 13 15 17

+ 0 2 4 6 8 A C E 10 12 14 16

T1-40

OUT

NC NC Vin

20 22 23 24 25 26 27 C1 29 2B 2C 2E

NC NC NC

C0 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2A C2 2D 2F

T1-MAR40 ... AC power supply, AC input type

C 1 3 5 7 9 B D F 11 13 15 17

NC NC

0 2 4 6 8 A C E 10 12 14 16

T1-40

OUT

NC NC

C0 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 C1 29 2B 2C 2E

NC NC NC

C0 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2A C2 2D 2F

T1-MDR40D ... DC power supply, DC input type

C 1 3 5 7 9 B D F 11 13 15 17

NC NC

0 2 4 6 8 A C E 10 12 14 16

T1-40

OUT

NC NC Vin

20 22 23 24 25 26 27 C1 29 2B 2C 2E

NC NC NC

C0 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2A C2 2D 2F

NOTE

NC stands for ”no connect”. Do not use the NC terminals for wire relaying or

branching.

74 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

4. Installation and Wiring

· T1-40S

T1-MDR40S ... AC power supply, DC input type

C 1 3 5 7 9 B D F 11 13 15 17

+ 0 2 4 6 8 A C E 10 12 14 16

T1-40S

OUT

Vin

RXB TXB

RXA

20 22 23 24 25 26 27 C1 29 2B 2C 2E

23 24 25 26 27 28 2A C2 2D 2F

TXA SG C0 21 22

T1-MAR40S ... AC power supply, AC input type

C 1 3 5 7 9 B D F 11 13 15 17

NC NC

0 2 4 6 8 A C E 10 12 14 16

T1-40S

OUT

RXB TXB

C0 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 C1 29 2B 2C 2E

RXA TXA SG

C0 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2A C2 2D 2F

T1-MDR40SD ... DC power supply, DC input type

C 1 3 5 7 9 B D F 11 13 15 17

NC NC

0 2 4 6 8 A C E 10 12 14 16

T1-40S

OUT

Vin

RXB TXB

20 22 23 24 25 26 27 C1 29 2B 2C 2E

RXA TXA SG

C0 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2A C2 2D 2F

NOTE

(1) NC stands for ”no connect”. Do not use the NC terminals for wire relaying

or branching.

(2) For the connections of the RS-485 communication port (left end 5

terminals of the lower terminal block), refer to the separate manual

“T1/T1S User’s Manual - Communication Function -.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}75

6F3B0250

4. Installation and Wiring

The applicable wire size is 0.3 mm²(22 AWG) to 1.25 mm²(16 AWG). The table below

shows the recommended wire size.

Type of signal

Power

Grounding

I/O signals

Recommended wire size

1.25 mm²(16 AWG)

0.3 mm²(22 AWG) to 0.75 mm²(18 AWG)

4.4 Grounding

1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.

CAUTION

2. Operation without grounding may cause electrical shock or malfunction.

Connect the ground terminal on the T1/T1S to the system ground.

The optimum method for grounding electronic equipment is to ground it separately from

other high-power systems, and to ground more than one units of electronic equipment

with a single-point ground.

Although the T1/T1S has noise immunity to be used in industrial operating conditions,

grounding is important for safety and reliability.

Check the grounding against the following criteria.

1. The T1/T1S must not become a path for a ground current. A high-frequency current is

particularly harmful.

2. Equalize the ground potentials when the expansion rack or unit is connected. Ground

the T1/T1S and the expansion rack or unit at a single point.

3. Do not connect the ground of the T1/T1S to that of high-power systems.

4. Do not use a ground that has an unstable impedance, such as painted screws, or

ground subject to vibration.

The grounding marked terminal (see below) is provided on the T1/T1S basic unit and the

expansion unit for grounding purpose.

76 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

4. Installation and Wiring

In case of the expansion rack is connected to the T1/T1S, the rack mounting screw is

used for this purpose.

Expansion rack

Mounting panel

System ground

· 1.25 mm²(16 AWG) wire should be used to connect the T1/T1S and the expansion

rack/unit with the enclosure grounding bus bar.

· 100 W or less to ground is required.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}77

6F3B0250

4. Installation and Wiring

4.5 Power supply wiring

1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.

CAUTION

2. Applying excess power voltage to the T1/T1S can cause explosion or fire.

Apply power of the specified ratings described below.

Wire the power source to the T1/T1S power supply terminals.

Insulation

Line filter

transformer

Power source

· Power conditions:

AC power supply type

100 to 240 Vac, +10/-15 %

50/60 Hz, ±5 %

DC power supply type

24 Vdc, +20/-15 %

Rated voltage

Frequency

Power consumption

30 VA or less (T1-16/T1-28) 12 W or less (T1-16/T1-28)

38 VA or less (T1-40)

45 VA or less (T1-40S)

18 W or less (T1-40)

18 W or less (T1-40S)

Retentive power

interruption

Continuous operation for less than 10 ms

· 1.25 mm²(16 AWG) twisted-pair cable should be used for the power cable.

· The power cable should be separated from other cables.

78 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

4. Installation and Wiring

Connections of the power supply terminals are shown below.

· AC power supply type

100 to 240 Vac

Grounding

100-240VAC

· DC power supply type

24 Vdc

Grounding

24Vdc

^{Basic Hardware and Function}79

6F3B0250

4. Installation and Wiring

4.6 I/O wiring

1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.

2. Exposed conductive parts of wire can cause electrical shock. Use

CAUTION

crimp-style terminals with insulating sheath or insulating tape to cover the

conductive parts. Also close the terminal covers securely on the terminal

blocks when wiring has been completed.

3. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal

blocks or wires. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage to

the T1/T1S and related equipment.

· Refer to sections 2.4 and 3 for instructions on how to properly wire the I/O terminals.

· 0.75 mm²(18 AWG) to 0.3 mm²(22 AWG) wires are recommended for I/O signals.

· Separate the I/O signal cables from high-power cables by at least 200 mm.

· If expansion rack or unit is used, separate the expansion cable from the power and I/O

signal cables by or unit at least 50 mm.

· It is recommended to separate the input signal cables from output signal cables.

200mm

or more

Input signal

Output

signal

High-power

cable

80 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

Section 5

Operating System Overview

5.1 Operation modes, 82

5.2 About the built-in EEPROM, 84

5.3 Scanning, 87

^{Basic Hardware and Function}81

6F3B0250

5. Operating System Overview

5.1 Operation modes

The T1/T1S has three basic operation modes, the RUN mode, the HALT mode and the

ERROR mode. The T1/T1S also has the HOLD and RUN-F modes mainly for system

checking.

RUN:

The RUN mode is a normal control-operation mode.

In this mode, the T1/T1S reads external signals, executes the user program

stored in the RAM, and outputs signals to the external devices according to the

user program. It is in the RUN mode that the T1/T1S performs scans the user

program logic, which is the basic operation of a PLC.

In case of the T1S, program changes and EEPROM write are possible while

the T1S is in the RUN mode. Refer to section 6.9.

On the other hand, in case of the standard T1, program changes and

EEPROM write are not possible in the RUN mode.

HALT:

The HALT mode is a programming mode.

In this mode, user program execution is stopped and all outputs are switched

off.

Program loading into the T1/T1S is possible only in the HALT mode.

For the standard T1, program changes and EEPROM write are possible only

when the T1 is in the HALT mode.

ERROR: The ERROR mode is a shut-down mode as a result of self-diagnosis.

The T1/T1S enters the ERROR mode if internal trouble is detected by self-

diagnosis. In this mode, program execution is stopped and all outputs are

switched off. The cause of the shut-down can be confirmed by connecting the

programming tool.

To exit from the ERROR mode, execute the Error Reset command from the

programming tool, or cycle power off and then on again.

HOLD: The HOLD mode is provided mainly for checking the external I/O signals.

In this mode, user program execution is stopped, with input and output

updating is executed. It is therefore possible to suspend program execution

while holding the output state. Moreover, a desired output state can be

established by setting any data by using the programming tool.

RUN-F: The RUN-F mode is a forced RUN mode provided for program checking.

This mode is effective when using the expansion I/Os.

Deferent from the normal RUN mode, the RUN-F mode allows operation even

if the registered option cards, expansion unit and/or I/O modules are not

actually mounted.

82 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

5. Operating System Overview

The operation modes are switched by the mode control switch provided on the T1/T1S

and the mode control commands issued from the programming tool.

The mode transition conditions are shown below.

(Power ON)

•

RUN

’

‘

•

HALT

HOLD

•

‘

’

RUN-F

“

ERROR

Œ Mode control switch is in R (RUN) side.

• Mode control switch is in H (HALT) side.

Ž Mode control switch is turned to H (HALT) side, or HALT command is issued from

the programming tool.

• Mode control switch is turned to R (RUN) side, or RUN command is issued from

the programming tool.

• Force RUN (RUN-F) command is issued from the programming tool.

‘ HOLD command is issued from the programming tool.

’ HOLD Cancel command is issued from the programming tool.

“ Error Reset command is issued from the programming tool.

(dotted line) Error is detected by self-diagnosis.

NOTE

The commands from the programming tool are available when the mode

control switch is in R (RUN) side.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}83

6F3B0250

5. Operating System Overview

5.2 About the built-in EEPROM

The T1/T1S is equipped with a built-in EEPROM and a RAM as standard features.

The user program is stored in the EEPROM so that the user program can be maintained

without the need of a battery. A part of the Data register can also be stored in the

EEPROM.

The table below shows the contents stored in the built-in EEPROM.

T1S

User program

User data

Entire program (2 k steps) and Entire program (8 k steps) and

System information

Leading 512 words of Data

System information

User specified number of Data

0. It is set by SW55.

D0000 - Dnnnn

D0000 - D0511

(up to 2048 words)

Other data

SW36 - SW38:

Programmer port settings

SW55:

Number of Data register to

be saved in the EEPROM

SW56 - SW57:

RS-485 port settings

The user program and the data stored in the EEPROM is transferred to the RAM when

power is turned on. Subsequent program execution is done based on the RAM contents.

Program editing is also performed on the RAM contents.

Therefore, if the program is modified, it is necessary to issue the EEPROM Write

command from the programming tool. Otherwise, the modified program is over-

written by original EEPROM contents when the power is turned off and on again.

84 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

5. Operating System Overview

< T1 >

EEPROM

RAM

User program

(2 k steps)

and System info

User program

(2 k steps)

and System info

•

‚

Data register

(D0000 to D0511)

Data register

(512 words)

Data register

(D0512 to D1023)

and

other registers

< T1S >

EEPROM

RAM

User program

(8 k steps)

User program

(8 k steps)

and System info

•

‚

Data register

(D0000 to Dnnnn,

user setting)

Data register

(0 to 2048 words,

user setting)

Other data

The rest of Data

other registers

• When power is turned on (it is called initial load) or EEPROM Read command is

issued from the programming tool. The EEPROM Read is possible only in the HALT

mode.

‚ When EEPROM Write command is issued from the programming tool. It is possible

only in the HALT mode (T1), or in other than the ERROR mode (T1S).

^{Basic Hardware and Function}85

6F3B0250

5. Operating System Overview

In case of the T1S, Special register SW55 is used to specify the number of Data registers

to be stored in the EEPROM. The allowable setting value is 0 to 2048.

The table below shows the correspondence between the SW55 value and Data registers

saved in the EEPROM.

SW55 setting

Range of Data registers saved in

EEPROM

Remarks

value

None

D0000 only

D0000 to D0001

D0000 to D0002

2047

2048

Others

D0000 to D2046

D0000 to D2027

Default value

Regarded as 2048

When the EEPROM Write command is executed, the T1S checks the value of SW55 and

saves the Data registers into the EEPROM depending on the SW55 value. The value of

SW55 itself is also saved in the EEPROM.

At the initial load or the EEPROM Read command is executed, the T1S checks the value

for SW55 in the EEPROM and transfers the corresponding number of data to the Data

registers of the RAM.

NOTE

(1) The EEPROM has the life limit for writing. It is 100,000 times. Pay

attention not to exceed the limit. If the number of execution of EEPROM

Write command exceeds 100,000 times, EEPROM alarm flag (S007)

comes ON.

(2) In the T1S, if the EEPROM Write command is executed in RUN mode,

only the user program is written into the EEPROM.

(3) The data in the EEPROM (D0000 to D0511 or D0000 to D2047) can also

be read or written by using the program instruction (FUN236 XFER

instruction).

(4) The SW55 setting is available only for the T1S.

86 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

5. Operating System Overview

5.3 Scanning

The flowchart below shows the basic internal operations performed by the T1/T1S from

the time power is turned on through program execution. As the diagram shows,

executing a program consists of continuous scanning operations. One scan is a cycle

starting with the self-diagnosis and ending with the completion of peripheral support.

Power ON

Hardware check

Power-up

initialization

(approx. 1 s)

Initial load

initialization

Self-diagnosis

HALT mode

Mode

control

RUN mode

scan

initialization

Program check

I/O update

Scan

At the first

scan

Scan cycle

Timer update

User program

execution

Peripheral

support

^{Basic Hardware and Function}87

6F3B0250

5. Operating System Overview

Hardware check:

Performs checking and initialization of the system ROM, the system RAM and the

peripheral LSIs.

Initial load:

Transfers the user program and user data from the EEPROM to the RAM. (Refer to

section 5.2)

Initializes registers and devices as shown below.

Initialization

External input (X/XW)

Forced inputs are retained. Others are cleared to 0.

External output (Y/YW) Forced coil devices are retained. Others are cleared to 0.

Auxiliary device/register User specified retentive registers and forced coil devices

(R/RW)

are retained. Others are cleared to 0.

Special device/register

(S/SW)

Special setting data are retained. Others are cleared to 0.

Timer device/register

(T./T)

User specified retentive registers are retained. Others are

cleared to 0.

Counter device/register User specified retentive registers are retained. Others are

(C./C)

cleared to 0.

Data register (D)

User specified retentive registers are retained. Others are

cleared to 0.

Index register (I, J, K)

Cleared to 0.

NOTE

(1) When the data stored in the EEPROM (Data registers) are used, these

registers should be specified as retentive. Otherwise, these data are

transferred from EEPROM to RAM, but then cleared to 0 at the

initialization.

(2) The data in the retentive registers are stored in RAM and backed up by

built-in capacitor. The back-up period is 6 hours or more at 25 °C (T1), or

168 hours or more at 25 °C (T1S).

The T1/T1S checks the validity of the retentive data at the power-up

initialization, and if they are not valid, sets the special device (S00F) to ON.

Therefore, it is recommended to check the status of S00F in the user

program and to initialize the retentive registers if S00F is ON.

(3) The retentive registers can be set by the programming tool for RW, T, C

and D registers. The registers from address 0 to the designated address

for each type are set as retentive registers. Refer to the separate manual

for the programming tool for setting the retentive registers.

(4) The input force and the forced coil are functions for program debugging.

For details, refer to section 6.7.

88 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

5. Operating System Overview

Self-diagnosis:

Checks the proper operation of the T1/T1S itself. If an error has detected and cannot be

recovered by re-tries, the T1/T1S moves into ERROR mode. For the self-diagnosis

items, refer to section 10.2.

Mode control:

Checks the mode control switch status and the mode control request commands from

the programming tool.

The scan mode - floating scan or fixed-time scan - is also controlled hear.

NOTE

The floating scan:

When one scan is finished, immediately starts the next scan. The scan time is

shortest, but may vary depending on the program execution status.

Scan time

The fixed-time scan:

The scan operation is started every user-specified time. The time setting range

is 10 to 200 ms (10 ms units). If an actual scan needs longer time than the

setting time, it works as the floating scan.

Scan time (50 ms fixed) Scan time (50 ms fixed)

(idling)

Program check:

At the beginning of the RUN mode, the user program is compiled and its validity is

checked.

I/O update:

Reads the external input signals into the external input devices/registers (X/XW), and

sends the data of the external output devices/registers (Y/YW) to the external output

circuits. Then the outputs (relays, etc.) changes the states and latches until the next I/O

update timing.

The states of the forced input devices are not updated by this operation.

Timer update:

Updates the timer registers which are activated in the user program, and the timing

devices (S040 to S047).

^{Basic Hardware and Function}89

6F3B0250

5. Operating System Overview

User program execution:

Executes the programmed instructions from the beginning to the END instruction.

This is the essential function of the T1/T1S.

In this section, only the main program execution is mentioned. For other program types,

such as timer interrupt, etc., refer to section 6.5.

Peripheral support:

Supports the communications with the programming tool or an external devices

connected by the computer link function. The time for this operation is limited within

approx. 2 ms in the floating scan mode, and within allowable idling time in the fixed-time

scan mode.

In case of the T1S, if the special relay S158 is set to ON, the peripheral support priority

mode is selected. In the peripheral support priority mode, the peripheral support time is

not limited. As the result, the communication response is improved although the scan

time becomes long at the time.

90 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

Section 6

Programming Information

6.1 Devices and registers, 92

6.2 Index modification, 104

6.3 Real-time clock/calendar, 106

6.4 I/O allocation, 107

6.5 T1S memory mode setting, 109

6.6 User program configuration, 110

6.7 Programming language, 116

6.8 Program execution sequence, 117

6.9 On-line debug support functions, 118

6.10 Password protection, 121

^{Basic Hardware and Function}91

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

6.1 Devices and registers

The T1/T1S program consists of bit-based instructions that handle ON/OFF information,

such as contact and coil instructions, and register-based (16-bit) instructions, such as

those for data transfer and arithmetic operations.

Devices are used to store the ON/OFF information of contacts and coils, and registers

are used to store 16-bit data.

Devices are divided into six types:

External input devices

External output devices

Auxiliary relay devices

Special devices

T. Timer devices

C. Counter devices

Registers are divided into eight types:

External input registers

External output registers

Auxiliary relay registers

Special registers

Timer registers

Counter registers

Data registers

I, J, K Index registers

Device and register numbers

X devices share the same memory area as XW registers. Device X014, for example,

represents the number 4 bit in the XW01 register.

Bit position / Number

(MSB)

(LSB)

D C

XW01

X014

Thus, "X014 is ON" means that bit number 4 of XW01 is 1.

Y, R, and S devices work in a similar manner.

92 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

Addressing devices

A device number of X, Y, R and S devices consists of a register number and bit position

as follows.

X 01 4

Represents bit position 0 to F in the register.

Decimal number representing the register containing the corresponding

device.

Represents the type of device. (X, Y, R, or S)

As for the timer (T.) and the counter (C.) devices, a device number is expressed as

follows.

T. 12

Corresponding register number. (decimal number)

Represents the type of device. (T. or C.)

Dot (.) is used to identify as device.

Addressing registers

A register number except the index registers is expressed as follows.

XW 01

Represents the type of register. (XW, YW, RW, SW, T, C or D)

The index registers (I, J and K) do not have the number.

I, J, or K

^{Basic Hardware and Function}93

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

Available address range

Device/register Symbol

T1S

Number of Address range Number of Address range

points

External input

device

External output

device

Total 512 X000 - X31F

points

Total 512 X000 - X31F

points

Y020 - Y31F

External input

External output

Auxiliary relay

device

Total 32

words

XW00 - XW31 Total 32

XW00 - XW31

words

YW02 - YW31

R000 - R63F

YW02 - YW31

1024

points

4096

R000 - R255F

points

Auxiliary relay

Special device

64 words RW00 - RW63 256 words RW000 -

RW255

1024

S000 - S63F

1024

S000 - S63F

points

Special register

Timer device

Timer register

Counter device

Counter register

Data register

64 words SW00 - SW63 64 words SW00 - SW63

64 points T.00 - T.63

64 words T00 - T63

64 points C.00 - C.63

64 words C00 - C63

256 points T.000 - T.255

256 words T000 - T255

256 points C.000 - C.255

256 words C000 - C255

D0000 - D1023 4096 D0000 - D4095

1024

words

1 word

words

1 word

J (no address) 1 word

K (no address) 1 word

Index register

I (no address)

J (no address)

K (no address)

NOTE

(1) 1 word = 16 bits

(2) The available data range in each register is -32768 to 32767 (H8000 to

H7FFF) except for the timer and the counter registers.

The data range of the timer register is 0 to 32767. That of the counter

(3) Double-word (32 bits) data is available in two consecutive registers.

In this case, lower address register stores the lower 16 bits data.

(MSB) F

0 (LSB)

D0101

D0100

Upper

16 bits

Lower

16 bits

In this manual, a double-word register is expressed by using ‘×’.

For example, D0101×D0100.

94 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

External input devices (X)

These devices (X) indicate the ON/OFF states of external input signals through the input

circuits. External input devices can be used many times in a program.

External output devices (Y)

The external output devices (Y) store the ON/OFF signals that drive the external devices

through the output circuits. They can be used for coils in a program.

External input registers (XW)

These (XW) are 16-bit registers for storing values which are received from the input

circuits.

External output registers (YW)

These 16-bit registers (YW) are used for storing values which are sent to the output

circuits.

Auxiliary relay devices and registers (R/RW)

The auxiliary relay devices (R) are used to store intermediate results of sequences. The

auxiliary relay registers (RW) are used to store temporary results of function instructions.

The data in R/RW cannot be output directly to the output circuits. It is necessary to move

the data to Y/YW.

It is possible to make these registers retentive so that they retain data in the event of a

power failure. See section 5.3.

Timer devices and registers (T./T)

The timer registers (T) are used for storing the elapsed time of timer instructions, the

on-delay (TON), off-delay (TOF) and single-shot (SS) timers.

0.01 s base timers and 0.1 s base timers are provided.

Time base

0.01 s

T1S

T000 to T063

T064 to T255

T000 to T031

T032 to T063

0.1 s

The timer devices (T.) works as the output of the timer instructions.

It is possible to specify the T registers as retentive to retain their data in the event of a

power failure. See section 5.3.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}95

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

Counter devices and registers (C./C)

The counter registers (C) are used for storing the count value of the counter (CNT) and

the up-down counter (U/D) instructions.

The counter devices (C.) works as the output of the counter instructions.

It is possible to specify the C registers as retentive to retain their data in the event of a

power failure. See section 5.3.

Data registers (D)

Functionally the data registers (D) are the same as auxiliary relay registers (RW) except

that the D registers cannot be used as devices.

A part of the data registers are saved in the built-in EEPROM as fixed data and

transferred into the RAM at the initial load. See section 5.2.

Range of the data registers saved in the EEPROM:

T1S

D0000 to D0511

User specified range

starting with D0000

(up to 2048 words)

It is possible to specify the D registers as retentive to retain their data in the event of a

power failure. See section 5.3.

Index registers (I, J, and K)

These index registers are used for indirect addressing for a register.

For example, if the value of I is 100 in the following register expression, it designates

D0100. For details, refer to section 6.2.

D0000

D0100 if I=100

96 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

Special devices and registers (S/SW)

The special devices (S) and special registers (SW) are used for special purposes. See

list below.

Device/

S000

S001

S002

S003

S004

S005

S006

S007

S008

Name

Function

0: Initialization4: HOLD mode

T1/T1S operation mode

1: HALT mode

2: RUN mode

3: RUN-F mode

6: ERROR mode

CPU error (down)

I/O error (down)

ON at error state (related to SW01)

ON at error state (related to SW02)

ON at error state (related to SW03)

ON when EEPROM write exceeds 100,000 times

Program error (down)

EEPROM alarm (alarm)

Fixed-time scan time-over ON when actual scan time is longer than the setting time

(alarm)

as fixed-time scan

S009

S00A

Reserved

Clock/calendar error

ON when clock/calendar data is illegal (T1S only)

(alarm)

S00B

S00C

S00D

S00E

S00F

Reserved

TL-F10 error (alarm)

ON when TOSLINE-F10 transmission error occurs

Reserved

ON when retentive data in RAM are invalid

Retentive data invalid

(alarm)

NOTE

(1) These devices are set by the T1/T1S operating system. These devices are

read only for user.

(2) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore these

devices cannot be used in the user program.

(3) Devices marked as (alarm) are set in the normal operation mode. These

devices can be used in the user program.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}97

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

Device/

S010

Name

Function

System ROM error (down) ON at error state

System RAM error (down) ON at error state

S011

S012

Program memory error

ON at error state

(down)

S013

S014

S015

S016

S017

S018

S019

S01A

S01B

S01C

S01D

S01E

S01F

EEPROM error (down)

ON at error state

Reserved

ON at error state

Watchdog timer error

(down)

S020

S021

S022

S023

S024

S025

S026

S027

S028

S029

S02A

S02B

S02C

S02D

S02E

S02F

I/O bus error (down)

I/O mismatch (down)

I/O no answer (down)

I/O parity error (down)

ON at error state (for T2 I/O modules)

ON at error state

ON at error state (for T2 I/O modules)

Reserved

NOTE

(1) These devices are set by the T1/T1S operating system. These devices are

read only for user.

(2) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore these

devices cannot be used in the user program.

98 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

Device/

S030

S031

S032

S033

S034

S035

S036

S037

S038

S039

S03A

S03B

S03C

S03D

S03E

S03F

S040

S041

S042

S043

S044

S045

S046

S047

S048

S049

S04A

S04B

S04C

S04D

S04E

S04F

Name

Program error

Function

ON at error state (related to SW06)

ON when the scan time exceeds 200 ms

Scan time over (down)

Reserved

Timing relay 0.1 s

Timing relay 0.2 s

Timing relay 0.4 s

Timing relay 0.8 s

Timing relay 1.0 s

Timing relay 2.0 s

Timing relay 4.0 s

Timing relay 8.0 s

OFF 0.05 s / ON 0.05 s (0.1 s interval)

OFF 0.1 s / ON 0.1 s (0.2 s interval)

OFF 0.2 s / ON 0.2 s (0.4 s interval)

OFF 0.4 s / ON 0.4 s (0.8 s interval)

OFF 0.5 s / ON 0.5 s (1.0 s interval)

OFF 1.0 s / ON 1.0 s (2.0 s interval)

OFF 2.0 s / ON 2.0 s (4.0 s interval)

OFF 4.0 s / ON 4.0 s (8.0 s interval)

Reserved

All OFF at the

beginning of

RUN mode

Reserved

Always OFF

Always ON

Always OFF

Always ON

NOTE

(1) These devices are set by the T1/T1S operating system. These devices are

read only for user.

(2) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore these

devices cannot be used in the user program.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}99

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

Device/

S050

Name

CF (carry flag)

Function

Used for instructions which manipulate carry

S051

ERF (instruction error flag) ON when instruction execution error is occurred

(related to alarm flags of SW06)

S052

S053

S054

S055

S056

S057

S058

S059

S05A

S05B

S05C

S05D

S05E

S05F

S060

S061

S062

S063

S064

Reserved

ON when illegal instruction is detected

Reserved

Illegal instruction (down)

Reserved

Boundary error (alarm)

ON when illegal address is designated by indirect

addressing (operation continued)

S065

S066

S067

S068

Reserved

Division error (alarm)

ON when error occurs in division instruction (operation

continued)

S069

S06A

S06B

BCD data error (alarm)

ON when BCD data error has detected in BCD operation

instructions (operation continued)

ON when table size error has detected in table operation

instructions (operation continued) (T1S only)

Table operation error

(alarm)

Encode error (alarm)

ON when error occurs in encode instruction (operation

continued)

Reserved

S06C

S06D

S06E

S06F

NOTE

(1) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore these

devices cannot be used in the user program.

(2) CF, ERF and devices marked as (alarm) can be reset by the user

program.

100 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

Device/

SW07

Name

Function

Clock/calendar (Year)

Lower 2 digits of the calendar year

(98, 99, 00, 01, ... )

Month (01, 02, ... 12)

Day (01, 02, ... 31)

Hour (00, 01, ... 59)

Minute (00, 01, ... 59)

Second (00, 01, ... 59)

Day of the week

SW08

SW09

SW10

SW11

SW12

SW13

Clock/calendar (Month)

Clock/calendar (Day)

Clock/calendar (Hour)

Clock/calendar (Minute)

Clock/calendar (Second)

Clock/calendar (Week)

They are stored in

the lower 8 bits by

BCD code

(T1S only)

(Sun = 00, Mon = 01, ... Sat = 06)

SW14

SW15

Reserved

Peripheral support priority Bit 8 (S158) is used to select peripheral support priority

(T1S only)

SW16

Mode of special input

functions

Used to select the special input functions

SW17

SW18

SW19

SW20

SW21

SW22

SW23

SW24

Input filter constant

Preset values for high

speed counter

Used to set the input filter constant

Used to set the preset values for high speed counters

Count values for high

speed counter

High speed counter control Control flags for the high speed counters

flags

Present count values of the high speed counters are

stored

SW25

SW26

Reserve

Mode of special output

functions

Used to select the special output functions

SW27

SW28

Special output control flags Control flags for the pulse/PWM output

Special output frequency

setting

Output frequency setting for the pulse/PWM output

SW29

SW30

SW31

SW32

PWM output duty setting

Analog setting value 1

Analog setting value 2

AUX LED control

Pulse duty setting for the PWM output

Input value of the analog setting adjuster V0

Input value of the analog setting adjuster V1

Bit 0 (S320) is used to control AUX LED

(T1-40/T1-40S only)

SW33

SW34

SW35

SW36

Reserved

TL-F10 send data

TL-F10 receive data

PRG port station address

TOSLINE-F10 transmission data (send to master)

TOSLINE-F10 transmission data (receive from master)

Used to set the programmer port station address

(1 to 32) (T1S only)

SW37

SW38

PRG port parity

Used to set the programmer port parity (0=none, 1=odd)

(T1S only)

Used to set the programmer port response delay time

(0 to 30: 0 to 300ms)

PRG port response delay

NOTE

(1) For details of SW16 though SW31, refer to section 8.

(2) For details of SW34 and SW35, refer to the Expansion I/O manual.

(3) For details of SW36 through SW38, refer to the Communication function

manual.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}101

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

Device/

S390

Name

Function

Timer interrupt execution

ON during execution

status

S391

S392

S393

S394

I/O interrupt #1 execution

status

I/O interrupt #2 execution

status

I/O interrupt #3 execution

status

I/O interrupt #4 execution

status

S395

S396

S397

S398

S399

S39A

S39B

S39C

S39D

S39E

S39F

S400

S401

Reserved

HOLD device

ON during HOLD mode (setting by user program is also

available)

Reserved

S402

S403

S404

S405

S406

S407

S408

S409

S40A

S40B

S40C

S40D

S40E

S40F

102 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

Device/

SW41

Name

Function

Sub-program #1 execution Bit 0 (S410) is ON during the sub-program #1 is executed

status

SW42

SW43

SW44

SW45

SW46

SW47

SW48

SW49

SW50

SW51

SW52

SW53

SW54

SW55

Reserved

Number of EEPROM write Used to set the number of data registers to be saved in

data

the EEPROM (0 to 2048, initial value is 2048) (T1S only)

SW56

SW57

SW58

RS-485 port operation

mode

RS-485 port response delay Used to set the RS-485 port response delay time

(0 to 30: 0 to 300ms) (T1S only)

Used to set the RS-485 port operation mode (T1S only)

RS-485 port Free ASCII

Used for the RS-485 port Free ASCII function (T1S only)

flags

SW59

SW60

SW61

SW62

SW63

Reserved

NOTE

(1) For details of SW55, refer to section 5.2.

(2) For details of SW56 through SW58, refer to the Communication function

manual.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}103

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

6.2 Index modification

When registers are used as operands of instructions, the method of directly designating

the register address as shown in Example 1) below is called ‘direct addressing’.

As opposed to this, the method of indirectly designating the register by combination with

the contents of the index register (I, J, or K) as shown in Example 2) below is called

‘indirect addressing’. In particular, in this case, since the address is modified using an

index register, this is called ‘index modification’.

Example 1)

¾[ RW10 MOV D1000 ]¾

Data transfer instruction

Transfer data of RW10 to D1000

Example 2)

¾[ RW10 MOV D0000 ]¾

Data transfer instruction (with index modification)

Transfer data of RW(10 + I) to D(0000 + J)

(If I = 3 and J = 200, the data of RW13 is transferred to D0200)

There are 3 types of index register, I, J and K. Each type processes 16-bit integers

(-32768 to 32767). There are no particular differences in function between these 3 types

of index register.

There is no special instruction for substituting values in these index registers. These are

designated as destination of data transfer instructions, etc.

¾[ 00064 MOV I ]¾

(substitutes 64 in index register I)

¾[ D0035 MOV J ]¾

(substitutes the data of D0035 in index register J)

¾[ RW20 + 00030 ® K ]¾ (substitutes the result of addition in index register K)

NOTE

(1) The index modification is available for RW, T, C and D registers.

(2) If index registers are used as a double-length register, only the

combinations J×I and K×J are allowed.

104 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

The followings are examples of index modifications.

When I = 0, it designates RW10.

When I = 1, it designates RW11.

When I = -1, it designates RW09.

When I = 10, it designates RW20.

When I = -10, it designates RW00.

RW10

When J = 0, it designates D0201×D0200.

When J = 1, it designates D0202×D0201.

When J = 2, it designates D0203×D0202.

When J = -1, it designates D0200×D0199.

When J = -2, it designates D0199×D0198.

D0201×D0200

Be careful that the registers do not exceed the address range by the index

modification. The address range is not checked by the T1/T1S.

CAUTION

NOTE

Substitutions of values into index registers and index modifications can be

used any times in a program. Normally, the program will be easier to see if a

value substitution into an index register is positioned immediately before the

index modification.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}105

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

6.3 Real-time clock/calendar (T1S only)

The T1S is equipped with the real-time clock/calendar for year, month, day, day of the

week, hour, minute, and second.

These data are stored in the special registers SW07 to SW13 by 2-digit BCD format as

follows.

SW07

Function

Year

Month

Day

Data

1998 = H0098, 1999 = H0099, 2000 = H0000, 2001 = H0001, ...

Jan. = H0001, Feb. = H0002, Mar. = H0003, ... Dec. = H0012

1st = H0001, 2nd = H0002, 3rd = H0003, ... 31st = H0031

H0000, H0001, H0002, ... H0022, H0023

H0000, H0001, H0002, ... H0058, H0059

SW08

SW09

SW10

SW11

SW12

SW13

Hour

Minute

Second

Week

Sun. = H0000, Mon. = H0001, Tue. = H0002, ... Sat. = H0006

Program example:

In the following circuit, output Y030 turns ON for 1 minute at every Sunday 6 pm.

(H0018)

Clock/calendar back-up:

The clock/calendar continues updating even while the power to the T1S is off by built-in

capacitor. Its buck-up period is as follows.

Temperature

25 °C

Expected value

300 hours

Guarantee value

168 hours

144 hours

72 hours

40 °C

In the T1S, the validity of the clock/calendar is checked. If the data is not valid by excess

power off period, special relay S00A is set to ON. Therefore, when the clock/calendar is

used, it is recommended to check the status of S00A in the user program.

Setting the clock/calendar:

To set the clock/calendar data, the following 2 ways are available. In both cases, the

week data is automatically calculated.

(a) Setting the clock/calendar data on the system information screen of the

programming tool.

(2) Using the Calendar Set instruction (CLND) in the user program.

106 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

6.4 I/O allocation

The external input signals are allocated to the external input devices/registers (X/XW).

The external output signals are allocated to the external output devices/registers (Y/YW).

The register numbers of the external input and output registers are consecutive. Thus

one register number can be assigned for either input or output.

As for the T1/T1S basic unit, I/O allocation is fixed as follows.

X000

X007

Inputs: 8 points (X000 - X007)

Outputs: 8 points (Y020 - Y027)

T1-16

Y020

X000

Y027

X00D

Inputs: 14 points (X000 - X00D)

Outputs: 14 points (Y020 - Y02D)

T1-28

Y020

X000

Y02D

X017

Y02F

Inputs: 24 points (X000 - X017)

Outputs: 16 points (Y020 - Y02F)

T1-40 / T1-40S

Y020

Any operation for the I/O allocation are not required if only the T1/T1S basic unit is used.

However, if the option cards, the Expansion unit and/or the T2 I/O modules are used with

the T1-40/T1-40S, the I/O allocation operation is necessary. For this information, refer to

the separate manual for Expansion I/O.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}107

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

Internally, the T1/T1S has an information called ‘I/O allocation table’ in its memory. This

I/O allocation table shows the correspondence between I/O hardware and software, i.e.

The contents of the I/O allocation table are as follows.

Slot

I/O type

X+Y 4W

PU slot must be blank

Slot 0 is for basic unit (XW00, XW01, YW02 and

YW03 are assigned internally)

Slots 1 to 3 are reserved for option cards

Slots 4 and 5 are reserved for Expansion unit

Slots 4 to 7 are reserved for T2 I/O modules

The T1/T1S operating system automatically sets the I/O type ‘X+Y 4W’ on the slot 0

position when the memory clear is executed for the T1/T1S.

When the T1/T1S program is developed in off-line, the above I/O allocation table should

be set before programming. For this operation (called manual I/O allocation), refer to the

programming tool manual.

108 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

6.5 T1S memory mode setting

The program capacity of the T1S is 8 k steps. However, user can set the T1S’s program

capacity to 4 k steps. It is called the T1S’s memory mode.

That is, the T1S has two memory modes, 8 k mode and 4 k mode.

In the 4 k mode, on-line program changes become available, although the program

capacity is limited to 4 k steps. Refer to section 6.9 for the on-line debug support

functions.

To set the T1S’s memory mode, write 4 k or 8 k on the Program Size Setting of the

System Parameters using the programming tool. Then execute the EEPROM write

command.

NOTE

There is no memory mode setting for the standard T1. The program capacity of

the standard T1 is 2 k steps fixed.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}109

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

6.6 User program configuration

A group of instructions for achieving the PLC-based control system is called ‘user

program’. The T1 has 2 k steps capacity for storing the user program. And the T1S has 8

k steps capacity for storing the user program.

A ‘step’ is the minimum unit which composes an instruction. Number of steps required for

one instruction is depending on the type of instruction. Refer to section 7.1.

The figure below shows the T1/T1S’s memory configuration.

RAM

System information

User program

2 k steps (T1)

4 k or 8 k steps (T1S)

Back-up area

by EEPROM

Data registers

mentioned in

section 5.2

Other registers/

devices

NOTE

For conditions of transfer between RAM and EEPROM, see section 5.2.

110 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

System information

System information is the area which stores execution control parameters. The following

contents are included in the system information.

(1) Machine parameters (hardware type, memory type)

(2) User program information (program ID, system comments, number of steps used)

(3) Passwords

(4) Retentive register area information

(5) T1S program memory mode, 4 k steps or 8 k steps (T1S only)

(6) Execution control parameters (scan mode, timer interrupt interval)

(7) Station number setting for programmer port (T1), or RS-485 port communication

parameters (T1S)

(8) I/O allocation table

(9) Input force table

The system information is stored in the built-in EEPROM. Therefore, when these

information is modified, the EEPROM write operation is necessary. Otherwise, these are

over-written by original EEPROM contents at the next initial load timing.

User program

The T1 has a capacity of 2 k steps of the user program. And the T1S has a capacity of 8

k steps of the user program.

The user program is stored by each program types as shown in the following diagram,

and is managed by units called blocks in each program types.

User program configuration

(Program types)

Program type internal configuration

(Blocks)

Block 1

Main program

Sub-program #1

Block 2

Timer interrupt

I/O interrupt #1

I/O interrupt #2

I/O interrupt #3

I/O interrupt #4

Block 10

Block N

(N = max. 256)

Block 1

Subroutine

^{Basic Hardware and Function}111

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

In the user program, the main program is the core. The scan operation explained in

section 5.3 is for the main program. The operation of other program types are explained

in the following sections.

The following 8 program types are supported by the T1/T1S.

(1) Main program

(2) Sub-program #1

(3) Timer interrupt program

(4) I/O interrupt program #1

(5) I/O interrupt program #2

(6) I/O interrupt program #3

(7) I/O interrupt program #4

(8) Subroutine

The blocks are just separators of the program, and have no effect on the program

execution. However, by dividing the user program into some blocks, the program

becomes easy to understand. The block numbers need not be consecutive.

In each program type and block, there is no limit of program capacity. The only limit is the

total capacity.

6.6.1 Main program

The main program is the core of the user program. It is executed once in each scan.

1 scan time

Main program

Mode I/O Timer

Main program

Time

Mode I/O Timer

In the above figure,

Mode means the mode control operation

I/O means the I/O update processing

Timer means the timer up date processing

Main program means the main program execution

the self-diagnostic check and peripheral support are omitted in this figure.

The end of the main program is recognized by the END instruction.

Although instructions may be present after the END instruction, these portions will not be

executed.

112 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

6.6.2 Sub-program #1

If the sub-program #1 is programmed, it is executed once at the beginning of the first

scan (before main program execution).

Therefore, the sub-program #1 can be used to set the initial value into the registers.

The sub-program #1 is called the initial program.

The figure below shows the first scan operation.

RUN mode

transition

1st scan

2nd scan

Main program

I/O Timer Sub#1

Main program

Mode I/O Timer

Time

The end of the sub-program #1 is recognized by the END instruction.

6.6.3 Timer interrupt program

The timer interrupt is the highest priority task. It is executed cyclically with a user

specified interval, with suspending other operation.

The interrupt interval is set in the system information. (5 to 1000 ms, 5 ms units)

1 scan

Scan

Timer interrupt

interval

Timer interrupt

interval

Time

The end of the timer interrupt is recognized by the IRET instruction.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}113

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

6.6.4 I/O interrupt programs

The I/O interrupt program is also the highest priority task. It is executed immediately

when the interrupt factor is generated, with suspending other operation.

the following 4 types I/O interrupt programs are supported in the T1/T1S.

(1) I/O interrupt #1

The I/O interrupt #1 is used with the high speed counter function. When the count

value reaches the preset value, etc., the I/O interrupt #1 is activated immediately

with suspending other operation. The end of the I/O interrupt #1 is recognized by the

IRET instruction. For detailed information, refer to section 8.3.

(2) I/O interrupt #2

The I/O interrupt #2 is also used with the high speed counter function. Refer to

section 8.3 for details.

(3) I/O interrupt #3

The I/O interrupt #3 is used with the interrupt input function. When the state of the

interrupt input is changed from OFF to ON (or ON to OFF), the I/O interrupt #3 is

activated immediately with suspending other operation. The end of the I/O interrupt

#3 is also recognized by the IRET instruction. For detailed information, refer to

section 8.4.

(4) I/O interrupt #4

The I/O interrupt #4 is also used with the interrupt input function. Refer to section 8.4

for details.

If an interrupt factor is generated while other interrupt program is executing (including the

timer interrupt), the interrupt factor is held. Then it will be activated after finishing the

other interrupt program execution.

If two or more interrupt factors are generated at the same time, the priority is as follows.

Timer > I/O #1 > I/O #2 > I/O #3 > I/O #4

114 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

6.6.5 Subroutines

In the program type ‘Subroutine’, The following number of subroutines can be

programmed.

Up to 16 subroutines

T1S

Up to 256 subroutines

The subroutine is not a independent program. It is called from other program types (main

program, sub-program, interrupt program) and from other subroutines (T1S only).

One subroutine is started with the SUBR instruction, and ended by the RET instruction.

It is necessary to assign a subroutine number to the SUBR instruction. The available

subroutine numbers are 0 to 15 for the T1, or 0 to 255 for the T1S.

¾[ SUBR (000) ]¾

Subroutine number

The RET instruction has no subroutine number.

The instruction that calls a registered subroutine is the CALL instruction. The CALL

instruction has the subroutine number to be called.

¾[ CALL N.000 ]¾

Subroutine number

Main program

Subroutine

Execution

flow

ú¾[ SUBR (000) ]¾¾¾ç

ú¾çú¾[ CALL N.000 ]¾¾ç

ú¾¾¾¾¾¾ [ RET ]¾ç

NOTE

(1) Multiple subroutines can be programmed in a block. However, one

subroutine in one block is recommended.

(2) In case of the T1S, other subroutines can be called from a subroutine

(nesting), up to 3 levels. In the T1, nesting is not allowed.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}115

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

6.7 Programming language

The programming language of the T1/T1S is ‘ladder diagram’.

Ladder diagram is a language which composes program using relay symbols as a base

in an image similar to a hard-wired relay sequence. In the T1/T1S, in order to achieve an

efficient data-processing program, ladder diagram which are combinations of relay

symbols and function blocks are used.

The ladder diagram program is constructed by units called ‘rung’. A rung is defined as

one network which is connected each other.

Rung number

Rung

The rung numbers are a series of numbers (decimal number) starting from 1, and cannot

be skipped. There is no limit to the number of rungs.

The size of any one rung is limited to 11 lines ´ 12 columns.

A example of a ladder diagram program is shown below.

When X005 is ON or the data of D0100 is greater than 200, Y027 comes ON.

Y027 stays ON even if X005 is OFF and the data of D0100 is 200 or less.

Y027 will come OFF when X006 comes ON.

116 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

6.8 Program execution sequence

The instructions execution sequence is shown below.

(1) They are executed in the sequence from block 1 through the final block which

contains the END instruction (or IRET in an interrupt program).

(2) They are executed in the sequence from rung 1 through the final rung in a block

(or the END instruction).

(3) They are executed according to the following rules in any one rung.

• When there is no vertical

connection, they are

executed from left to right.

‚ When there is an OR

connection, the OR logic

portion is executed first.

ƒ When there is a branch, they

are executed in the order from

the upper line to the lower line.

„ A combination of ‚ and ƒ

above.

The instructions execution sequence in which function instructions are included also

follows the above rules. However, for program execution control instructions, such as

jumps (JCS), loops (FOR-NEXT), subroutines (CALL-SUBR-RET), it will depend the

specifications of each instruction.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}117

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

6.9 On-line debug support functions

The following on-line (during RUN) functions are supported in the T1/T1S for effective

program debugging.

On-line function

T1S

4 k mode

Yes

8 k mode

Yes

Force function

Yes

Sampling trace function

Changing timer /counter preset

value

Yes

Changing constant operand of

function instruction

Yes

Changing device directly

Program changing in edit mode

EEPROM write command

Yes

NOTE

Refer to section 6.5 for 4 k/8 k mode of the T1S.

Force function

Two types of force functions are available, input force and coil force.

The input force is used to disable the external input signals. When an external input

device is designated as forced input, the ON/OFF state of the device can be changed

manually by using the data setting function of the programming tool, regardless of the

corresponding external signal state. The input force designation is available for the

external input devices (X).

The coil force is used to disable the coil instruction. When a coil instruction on the

program is designated as forced coil, the ON/OFF state of the coil device can be

changed manually by using the data setting function of the programming tool, regardless

of the coil circuit execution status.

On the programming tool, the forced input and forced coil are expressed as follows.

Forced input

X005

x005

Normal

Y023

Forced

Y023

Forced coil

NOTE

Normal

Forced

If EEPROM write operation is executed with remaining the force designation,

the force designation is also saved into the built-in EEPROM. Because the

force function is debugging function, release all force designation before

executing the EEPROM write operation. The force batch release command is

available when the T1/T1S is in HALT mode.

118 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

Sampling trace function

The sampling trace function collects the status of specified devices or register at every

specified sampling timing. The collected data can be displayed on the programmer (T-

PDS) screen in the format of timing chart (for devices) or trend graph (for register). The

minimum sampling timing is the T1/T1S’s scan cycle.

This function is useful for program debugging and troubleshooting.

T1S

Sampling target

Devices (up to 8) or

256 times for device

128 times for register

Devices (up to 8) and

Registers (up to 3)

256 times

Sampling capacity

The collected data is stored in the T1/T1S internal buffer.

The buffer works as a ring buffer, and latest collected data can be displayed.

The sampling start/stop condition (arm condition) and the collection timing (trigger

condition) can be specified by status changing of devices.

For detailed key operations for arm/trigger conditions setting on the T-PDS, refer to the

manual for T-PDS.

T-PDS screen example of device timing chart

NOTE

(1) On the T-PDS, select ‘3 registers + 8 devices’ as the sampling type.

(2) As the arm and trigger conditions, register values cannot be used.

(3) The After times setting is not effective for the T1/T1S.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}119

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

Timer/counter preset value (constant data) changing

The preset value (constant data) of timer or counter instruction can be changed in on-line

(during RUN) by using the programming tool.

Function instruction constant operand changing (T1S only)

The constant operand of function instruction can be changed in on-line (during RUN) by

using the programming tool.

Device changing (T1S only)

The device of contact or coil instruction can be changed in on-line (during RUN) by using

the programming tool.

On-line program changing (T1S only)

When the T1S’s memory mode is 4 k mode, the program can be changed using normal

edit mode. (rung by rung)

In the on-line program changing, it is not allowed to change the number or order of the

following instructions.

END, MCS, MCR, JCS, JCR, FOR, NEXT, CALL, SUBR, RET, IRET

NOTE

The above on-line functions are performed on the RAM memory. Therefore,

when program has been changed, execute the EEPROM write operation

before turning off power. Otherwise, program stored in the EEPROM will be

overwritten.

On-line EEPROM write (T1S only)

The EEPROM write is possible in on-line (during RUN) as well as in HALT mode.

In the on-line EEPROM write, user data is not written into the EEPROM.

During this operation, the T1S’s scan time becomes longer. However, as it has the time

limit per scan, the T1S’s control operation is not stopped.

NOTE

In case of the standard T1, the EEPROM write is possible only in the HALT

mode.

120 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

6. Programming Information

6.10 Password protection

The T1/T1S has the password function to protect the user program and data from

unauthorized operations.

There are four levels of protection. Accordingly, three levels of passwords can be

registered to control the protection levels.

These passwords are stored in the built-in EEPROM. Therefore, if you entered, changed

or cleared the passwords, the EEPROM write operation is necessary.

The outline of the protection levels are shown below. For details, refer to the manual for

the programming tool.

Protection level 4 (disabled functions)

· Writing register/device data

· Writing system information

· I/O allocation

Protection level 3 (disabled functions)

· Reading program

Strict

· Program write into EEPROM

Protection level 2 (disabled functions)

· Clear memory

· Writing/loading program

· T1/T1S operation mode changes (by programming tool)

· Setting/changing passwords

Protection level 1 (disabled functions)

· None (all functions are available)

When the level 1, 2 and 3 passwords are registered, the T1/T1S will be started as

protection level 4. In this state, for example, entering the level 2 password changes the

protection level to 2.

NOTE

When you use the password function, do not forget the level 1 password.

Otherwise, you cannot change/release the registered passwords.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}121

6F3B0250

122 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

Section 7

Instructions

7.1 List of instructions, 124

7.2 Instruction specifications, 134

^{Basic Hardware and Function}123

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

7.1 List of instructions

The T1 has 17 types of basic ladder instructions and 76 types of function instructions, the

T1S has 21 types of basic ladder instructions and 99 types of function instructions as

listed below. The specifications of each instruction will be described in detail later.

The tables listing these instructions are provided as a quick reference. (Note: In the

following table, italic character means operand, i.e. register, device or constant value.)

Basic ladder instructions

FUN

No.

Name

NO contact

NC contact

Expression

Function

Steps Speed Available Page

T1 T1S

(ms)

NO (normally open) contact of

device A.

NC (normally closed) contact of

device A.

Turns ON output for 1 scan

when input changes from OFF

to ON.

1.4 - 3.3

135

136

137

1.4 - 3.3

3.0

Transitional contact

(rising)

Transitional contact

(falling)

Turns ON output for 1 scan

when input changes from ON to

OFF.

3.0

138

Coil

Relay coil of device A.

2.3

139

140

Forced coil

Forced coil of device A. State of

device A is retained regardless

of the input state.

Inverter

Inverts the input state.

1.4 - 3.3

2.3

141

142

Invert coil

Stores the inverse state of input

into device A.

Positive pulse

contact

Turns ON output for 1 scan

when input is ON and device A

changes from OFF to ON.

Turns ON output for 1 scan

when input is ON and device A

changes from ON to OFF.

Turns ON device A for 1 scan

when input changes from OFF

to ON.

Turns ON device A for 1 scan

when input changes from ON to

OFF.

Turns ON output when the time

specified by A has elapsed

after the input came ON. B is a

timer register.

Turns OFF output when the

time specified by A has elapsed

after the input came OFF. B is a

timer register.

Turns ON output for the time

specified by A when the input

comes ON. B is a timer register.

143

144

145

146

147

Negative pulse

contact

Positive pulse coil

Negative pulse coil

ON delay timer

-[ A TON B ]-

-[ A TOF B ]-

-[ A SS B ]-

12.6

12.8

13.0

OFF delay timer

Single shot timer

148

149

124 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN

No.

Name

Counter

Expression

Function

Steps Speed Available Page

T1 T1S

(ms)

CNT

A B

Counts the number of cycles

the count input (C) comes ON

while the enable input (E) is

ON, and turns ON output (Q)

when the count reaches to the

value specified by A. B is a

counter register.

22.6

150

Master control set

Turns OFF power rail between

3.75

151

152

153

ú--[ MCS ]-ê

ú--[ MCR ]-ê

Master control

reset

Jump control set

MCS and MCR when MCS

input is OFF.

Jumps from JCS to JCR when

(in a

pair)

2.75

ú--[ JCS ]-ê

ú--[ JCR ]-ê

Jump control reset

JCS input is ON.

(in a

pair)

1.4

End

Indicates end of main program

or sub-program.

ú--[ END ]-ê

Data transfer instructions

FUN

No.

018 Data transfer

019 Double-word

data transfer

Name

Expression

Function

Steps Speed Available Page

T1 T1S

(ms)

4.2

7.2

-[ A MOV B ]-

-[ A+1×A DMOV B+1×B ]-

Transfers data of A to B.

Transfers double-word data of

A+1×A to B+1×B.

154

155

-[ A NOT B ]-

020 Invert transfer

Transfers bit-inverted data of

A to B.

Exchanges data of A with B.

4.6

6.5

156

-[ A XCHG B ]-

-[ A TINZ (n) B ]-

022 Data exchange

024 Table initialize

157

158

Transfers data of A to n

registers starting with B.

Transfers data of n registers

starting with A to n registers

starting with B.

Transfers bit-inverted data of

n registers starting with A to n

registers starting with B.

Transfers data from the

table, size n starting with A, to

-[ A TMOV (n) B ]-

-[ A TNOT (n) B ]-

025 Table transfer

159

160

194

026 Table invert

transfer

-[ A MPX (n) B ® C ]-

090 Multiplexer

70.6

71.5

-[ A DPX (n) B ® C ]-

091 Demultiplexer

Transfers data from A to the

table, size n starting with C.

195

^{Basic Hardware and Function}125

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

Arithmetic operations

FUN

No.

027 Addition

Name

Expression

-[ A + B ® C ]-

-[ A - B ® C ]-

Function

Steps Speed Available Page

T1 T1S

(ms)

Adds data of A and B, and

stores the result in C.

Subtracts data of B from A,

and stores the result in C.

Multiplies data of A and B,

and stores the result in

6.5

161

162

163

028 Subtraction

029 Multiplication

6.5

8.8

-[ A * B ® C+1×C ]-

double-length register C+1×C.

Divides data of A by B, and

stores the quotient in C and

the reminder in C+1.

-[ A / B ® C ]-

030 Division

9.7

164

165

-[ A+1×A D+ B+1×B ® C+1×C ]-

031 Double-word

addition

11.6

Adds data of A+1×A and

and stores the result in

B+1 B,

C+1 C.

-[ A+1×A D- B+1×B ® C+1×C ]-

032 Double-word

subtraction

11.7

9.7

166

167

Subtracts data of B+1×B from

× , and stores the result

A+1 A

in C+1×C.

-[ A +C B ® C ]-

035 Addition with

carry

Adds data of A, B and the

carry, and stores the result in

C. The carry flag changes

according to the result.

Subtracts data of B and the

-[ A -C B ® C ]-

036 Subtraction

with carry

9.7

168

carry from , and stores the

result in C. The carry flag

changes according to the

result.

-[ A U* B ® C+1×C ]-

-[ A U/ B ® C ]-

039 Unsigned

multiplication

Multiplies data of A and B,

and stores the result in

double-length register C+1×C.

(Unsigned integer operation)

Divides data of A by B, and

stores the quotient in and

the reminder in C+1.

(Unsigned integer operation)

Divides data of A+1×A by B,

and stores the quotient in C

and the reminder in C+1.

(Unsigned integer operation)

Increments data of A by 1.

Decrements data of A by 1.

169

170

171

040 Unsigned

division

-[ A+1×A DIV B ® C ]-

041 Unsigned

double/single

division

15.3

-[ +1 A ]-

-[ -1 A ]-

043 Increment

044 Decrement

4.6

172

173

126 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

Logical operations

FUN

No.

048 AND

Name

Expression

-[ A AND B ® C ]-

-[ A OR B ® C ]-

-[ A EOR B ® C ]-

-[ A TEST B ]-

Function

Steps Speed Available Page

T1 T1S

(ms)

Finds logical AND of A and B,

and stores it in C.

Finds logical OR of A and B,

and stores it in C.

Finds logical exclusive OR of A

and B, and stores it in C.

Turns ON output if logical AND

of A and B is not 0.

5.7

174

175

176

181

050 OR

5.7

5.0

052 Exclusive OR

064 Bit test

Shift operations

FUN

No.

Name

Expression

Function

Steps Speed Available Page

T1 T1S

(ms)

-[ SHR1 A ]-

1 bit shift right

Shifts data of A 1 bit to the right

(LSB direction). The carry flag

changes according to the result.

Shifts data of A 1 bit to the left

(MSB direction). The carry flag

changes according to the result.

Shifts data of A n bits to the right

(LSB direction) and stores the

result in B. The carry flag

6.8

182

183

184

068

069

070

-[ SHL1 A ]-

1 bit shift left

6.8

-[ A SHR n ® B ]-

n bit shift right

10.2

changes according to the result.

Shifts data of A n bits to the left

(MSB direction) and stores the

result in B. The carry flag

changes according to the result.

When shift input (S) comes ON,

shifts the data of specified shift

stores data input (D) state into A.

This operation is enabled while

enable input (E) is ON. The carry

flag changes according to the

result.

-[ A SHL n ® B ]-

n bit shift left

Shift register

10.2

185

186

071

074

(n)

65.9 -

76.2

Shift register: n devices starting

with device A.

DSR

(n)

Bi-directional

shift register

When shift input (S) comes ON,

shifts the data of specified shift

right depending on direction input

(L). This operation is enabled

while enable input (E) is ON. The

carry flag changes according to

the result.

69.0 -

79.3

188

075

Shift register: n devices starting

with device A.

Direction: Left when L is ON,

right when L is OFF

^{Basic Hardware and Function}127

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

Rotate operations

FUN

No.

Name

Expression

-[ RTR1 A ]-

Function

Steps Speed Available Page

T1 T1S

(ms)

078 1 bit rotate right

079 1 bit rotate left

080 n bit rotate right

Rotates data of A 1 bit to the

right (LSB direction). The

carry flag changes according

to the result.

Rotates data of A 1 bit to the

left (MSB direction). The

carry flag changes according

to the result.

Rotates data of A n bits to the

right (LSB direction) and

stores the result in B. The

carry flag changes according

to the result.

6.8

190

191

192

-[ RTL1 A ]-

6.8

-[ A RTR n ® B ]-

10.2

-[ A RTL n ® B ]-

081 n bit rotate left

Rotates data of A n bits to the

left (MSB direction) and

stores the result in B. The

carry flag changes according

to the result.

10.2

193

Compare instructions

FUN

No.

096 Greater than

097 Greater than or

equal

Name

Expression

Function

Steps Speed Available Page

T1 T1S

(ms)

6.1

5.3

-[ A > B ]-

-[ A >= B ]-

196

197

Turns ON output if A > B.

Turns ON output if A ³ B.

-[ A = B ]-

-[ A <> B ]-

-[ A < B ]-

-[ A <= B ]-

098 Equal

099 Not equal

100 Less than

101 Less than or

equal

5.0

6.1

5.3

198

199

200

201

Turns ON output if A = B.

Turns ON output if A ¹ B.

Turns ON output if A < B.

Turns ON output if A £ B.

-[ A+1×A D> B+1×B ]-

102 Double-word

greater than

103 Double-word

greater than or

equal

Turns ON output

if A+1×A > B+1×B.

Turns ON output

if A+1×A ³ B+1×B.

6.1

5.3

202

203

-[ A+1×A D>= B+1×B ]-

-[ A+1×A D= B+1×B ]-

-[ A+1×A D<> B+1×B ]-

-[ A+1×A D< B+1×B ]-

-[ A+1×A D<= B+1×B ]-

104 Double-word

equal

105 Double-word

not equal

106 Double-word

less than

107 Double-word

less than or

equal

Turns ON output

if A+1×A = B+1×B.

Turns ON output

if A+1×A ¹ B+1×B.

Turns ON output

if A+1×A < B+1×B.

Turns ON output

if A+1×A £ B+1×B.

5.0

6.1

5.3

204

205

206

207

128 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN

No.

108 Unsigned

greater than

109 Unsigned

greater than or

equal

Name

Expression

-[ A U> B ]-

Function

Steps Speed Available Page

T1 T1S

(ms)

208

209

Turns ON output if A > B.

(Unsigned integer compare)

Turns ON output if A ³ B.

(Unsigned integer compare)

-[ A U>= B ]-

-[ A U= B ]-

-[ A U<> B ]-

-[ A U< B ]-

-[ A U<= B ]-

110 Unsigned

equal

111 Unsigned

not equal

112 Unsigned

less than

113 Unsigned

less than or

equal

210

211

212

213

Turns ON output if A = B.

(Unsigned integer compare)

Turns ON output if A ¹ B.

(Unsigned integer compare)

Turns ON output if A < B.

(Unsigned integer compare)

Turns ON output if A £ B.

(Unsigned integer compare)

Special data processing

FUN

No.

Name

Expression

-[ SET A ]-

Function

Steps Speed Available Page

T1 T1S

(ms)

114 Device/register

set

If A is a device:

4.2

214

Sets device to ON.

If A is a register:

Stores HFFFF in register A.

-[ RST A ]-

115 Device/register

reset

If A is a device:

4.2

215

Resets device to OFF.

If A is a register:

Stores 0 in register A.

Sets the carry flag to ON.

Resets the carry flag to OFF.

-[ SETC ]-

-[ RSTC ]-

-[ A ENC (n) B ]-

118 Set carry

119 Reset carry

120 Encode

4.2

57.0 -

141.4

216

217

218

Finds the uppermost ON bit

position in the bit file of size 2ⁿ

bits starting with register A, and

stores it in B.

-[ A DEC (n) B ]-

121 Decode

In the bit file of size 2ⁿbits

starting with register B, sets ON

the bit position indicated by lower

n bits of A, and resets OFF all

other bits.

69.5 -

99.1

219

-[ A BC B ]-

122 Bit count

147 Flip-flop

Counts the number of ON bits of

A and stores it in B.

Sets ON device A when set input

(S) is ON, and resets OFF device

A when reset input (R) is ON.

(Reset takes priority)

While enable input (E) is ON,

counts up or down the number of

cycles the count input (C) comes

ON, depending on the up/down

select input (U).

220

233

F/F

26.7

30.1

U/D

149 Up-down

counter

234

Up when U is ON, down when U

is OFF.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}129

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

Program control instructions

FUN

No.

Name

Expression

Function

Steps Speed Available Page

T1 T1S

(ms)

-[ CALL N. n ]-

ú--[ RET ]-ê

128 Subroutine call

129 Subroutine

return

Calls the subroutine number n.

Indicates the end of a

subroutine.

21.0

221

222

(in a

pair)

22.0

(in a

pair)

-[ FOR n ]-

-[ NEXT ]-

132 FOR

When the input of FOR is ON,

executes the segment from

FOR to NEXT the number of

times specified by n.

Indicates the start of the

subroutine number n.

Enables execution of interrupt

program.

Disables execution of interrupt

program.

Indicates the end of an interrupt

program.

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

133 NEXT

ú-[ SUBR (n) ]--ê

-[ EI ]-

137 Subroutine

entry

140 Enable interrupt

included

in CALL

27.6

(in a

pair)

-[ DI ]-

141 Disable

interrupt

142 Interrupt return

ú--[ IRET ]-ê

-[ WDT n ]-

-[ STIZ (n) A ]-

1.4

143 Watchdog timer

reset

144 Step sequence

initialize

Extends the scan time over

detection time.

16.1

Resets OFF the n

These

59.9 -

65.0

devices stating with configure

a series

of step

A, and sets ON A.

Turns ON output if

-[ STIN A ]-

145 Step sequence

input

27.0

231

232

input is ON and A is sequence

ON.

-[ STOT A ]-ê

146 Step sequence

output

When input is ON,

resets OFF the

27.0 -

119.0

devices of STIN on

the same rung, and

sets ON A.

RAS

FUN

No.

154 Set calendar

Name

Expression

-[ A CLND ]-

Function

Steps Speed Available Page

T1 T1S

(ms)

Sets 6 registers data starting

with A into clock/calendar.

Calculates difference between

present date & time and past

date & time stored in 6 registers

starting with A, and stores the

result in 6 registers starting with

235

236

-[ A CLDS B ]-

155 Calendar

operation

130 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

Functions

FUN

Name

Expression

Function

Steps Speed Available Page

No.

T1 T1S

(ms)

-[ A MAVE (n) B ® C ]-

056 Moving average

Calculates the average value

of latest n scan values of A,

and stores the result in C.

Filters the value of A by filter

constant specified by B, and

stores the result in C.

Performs PID control. (pre-

derivative real PID algorithm)

Process value (PV): A

177

178

237

-[ A DFL B ® C ]-

061 Digital filter

-[ A PID3 B ® C ]-

156 Pre-derivative

real PID

85.0 -

428.0

Set value (SV): A+1

PID parameters: B and after

Manipulation value (MV): C

Upper limits the value of A by

B, and stores the result in C.

Lower limits the value of A by

B, and stores the result in C.

Finds the maximum value of n

registers data starting with A,

and stores the value in C and

the pointer in C+1.

-[ A UL B ® C ]-

-[ A LL B ® C ]-

-[ A MAX (n) B ]-

160 Upper limit

242

243

244

161 Lower limit

162 Maximum value

-[ A MIN (n) B ]-

163 Minimum value

164 Average value

Finds the minimum value of n

registers data starting with A,

and stores the value in C and

the pointer in C+1.

Calculates the average value

of n registers data starting

with A, and stores the result in

245

246

247

-[ A AVE (n) B ]-

-[ A FG (n) B ® C ]-

165 Function

generator

Finds f(x) for given x=A, and

77.7 -

142.1

stores it in . The function f(x)

is defined by parameters

stored in a table 2´n registers

starting with B.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}131

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

Conversion instructions

FUN

No.

Name

Expression

Function

Steps Speed Available Page

T1 T1S

(ms)

-[ A HTOA (n) B ]-

062 Hex to ASCII

conversion

Converts the hexadecimal

data of n words stating with A

into ASCII characters, and

stores them in nx2 registers

starting with B.

179

-[ A ATOH (n) B ]-

063 ASCII to Hex

conversion

Converts the ASCII

180

characters stored in n

registers stating with A into

hexadecimal data, and stores

them in n/2 registers starting

with B.

-[ A ABS B ]-

180 Absolute value

182 2’s complement

Stores the absolute value of A

in B.

Stores the 2’s complement

value of A in B.

Stores the 2’s complement

value of A+1×A in B+1×B.

Converts lower 4 bits of A into

7-segment code, and stores it

in B.

5.0

4.6

249

250

251

252

-[ A NEG B ]-

-[ A+1×A DNEG B+1×B ]-

-[ A 7SEG B ]-

183 Double-word

2’s complement

185 7-segment

decode

4.6

43.9

-[ A ASC B ]-

186 ASCII

conversion

Converts the alphanumerics 3 - 10 29.8 -

254

(max. 16 characters) of A into

ASCII codes, and stores them

in registers starting with B.

Converts the BCD data in A

into binary data, and stores it

in B.

49.6

65.5

55.6

-[ A BIN B ]-

188 Binary

conversion

255

256

-[ A BCD B ]-

190 BCD

Converts the binary data in A

into BCD data, and stores it in

conversion

132 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

Special I/O instructions

FUN

No.

235 Direct I/O

Name

Expression

-[ I/O (n) A ]-

Function

Steps Speed Available Page

T1 T1S

(ms)

Performs the immediate block

I/O transfer of n registers

starting with A.

Writes data into the built-in

EEPROM, or reads data from

the EEPROM. The transfer

source and destination are

indirectly designated by A and

C. The transfer register size is

designated by B.

20.7 +

21.3 ´ n

257

259

-[ A XFER B ® C ]-

236 Expanded data

transfer

54.0

1w read

7130

16w

write

-[ A READ B ® C ]-

237 Special module

data read

Reads data from the special

module indicated by A and

stores the data in a table

starting with C. The transfer

source address and size are

designated by B and B+1.

Writes data stored in a table

starting with A into the special

module indicated by C. The

transfer destination address

and size are designated by B

and B+1.

126.0 +

7.9 ´ N

(N: size)

263

265

-[ A WRITE B ® C ]-

238 Special module

data write

126.0 +

7.9 ´ N

(N: size)

NOTE

The index modification is available for some instructions. The values in the

execution speed column show the execution time without index modification.

If index modification is used, approx. 20 ms is added per one indexed operand.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}133

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

7.2 Instruction specifications

The following pages in this section describe the detailed specifications of each

instruction. On each page, the following items are explained.

Expression

Shows the operands required for the instruction as italic characters.

Function

Explains the functions of the instruction with referring the operands shown on the

Expression box.

Execution condition

Shows the execution condition of the instruction and the instruction output status.

Operand

Shows available register, device or constant value for each operand. For constant

operand, available value range is described. If the constant column is just marked (Ö), it

means normal value range (-32768 to 32767 in 16-bit integer or -2147483648 to

2147483647 in 32-bit integer) is available.

Whether index modification for a register operand is usable or not is also shown for each

operand.

Example

Explains the operation of the instruction by using a typical example.

Note

Explains supplementary information, limitations, etc. for the instruction.

134 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

NO contact

Expression

Input

Output

Function

NO (normally open) contact of device A.

When the input is ON and the device A is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF Regardless of the state of device A

When device A is OFF

When device A is ON

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Device

Example

Coil Y022 comes ON when the devices X000 and R001 are both ON.

X000

R001

Y022

^{Basic Hardware and Function}135

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

NC contact

Expression

Input

Output

Function

NC (normally closed) contact of device A.

When the input is ON and the device A is OFF, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF Regardless of the state of device A

When device A is OFF

When device A is ON

OFF

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Device

Example

Coil Y022 comes ON when the devices X000 and R001 are both OFF.

X000

R001

Y022

136 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

Transitional contact (Rising edge)

Expression

Input

Output

Function

When the input at last scan is OFF and the input at this scan is ON, the output is turned ON.

This instruction is used to detect the input changing from OFF to ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF Regardless of the input state at last scan

When the input state at last scan is OFF

When the input state at last scan is ON

OFF

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

Coil Y022 comes ON for only 1 scan when the device X000 comes ON.

X000

Y022

1 scan time

Note

· In case of T1, the maximum usable number in a program is 512. (

and

total)

· In case of T1S, the maximum usable number in a program is 2048.

(

(P)

(N)

total)

^{Basic Hardware and Function}137

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

Transitional contact (Falling edge)

Expression

Input

Output

Function

When the input at last scan is ON and the input at this scan is OFF, the output is turned ON.

This instruction is used to detect the input changing from ON to OFF.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF When the input state at last scan is OFF

When the input state at last scan is ON

Regardless of the input state at last scan

OFF

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

Coil Y022 comes ON for only 1 scan when the device X000 comes OFF.

X000

Y022

1 scan time

Note

· In case of T1, the maximum usable number in a program is 512. (

and

total)

· In case of T1S, the maximum usable number in a program is 2048.

(

(P)

(N)

total)

138 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

( )

Coil

Expression

Input ( )

Function

Relay coil of device A.

When the input is ON, the device A is set to ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF Sets device A to OFF

Sets device A to ON

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Device

Example

Coil Y025 comes ON when the devices X000 is ON.

X000

Y025

^{Basic Hardware and Function}139

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

Forced coil

Expression

Input

Function

Regardless of the input sate the state of device A is retained.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF No operation

No operation

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Device

Example

Device Y025 retains the preceding state regardless of the devices X000 state.

X000

Y025

Set force

Reset force

Set force

Reset force

Note

· The forced coil is a debugging function. The state of a forced coil device can be set ON or OFF by

the programming tool.

140 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

Inverter

Expression

Input

Output

Function

When the input is OFF, the output is turned ON, and when the input is ON, the output is turned OFF.

This instruction inverts the link state.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF Inverts the input state

Inverts the input state

OFF

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

Y022 comes ON when X000 is OFF, and Y022 comes OFF when X000 is ON.

X000

Y022

^{Basic Hardware and Function}141

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

( I )

Invert coil

Expression

Input ( I )

Function

When the input is OFF, the device A is set to ON, and when the input is ON, the device A is set to OFF.

This instruction inverts the input state and store it in the device A.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF Sets device A to ON

Sets device A to OFF

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Device

Example

Y025 comes ON when X000 is OFF, and Y025 comes OFF when X000 is ON.

X000

Y025

142 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

Positive pulse contact

T1S only

Expression

Input

Output

Function

When the input is ON and the device A is changed from OFF to ON (OFF at last scan and ON at this

scan), the output is turned ON.

This instruction is used to detect the device changing from OFF to ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF Regardless of the state of device A

State of device A is OFF

State of device A is ON

A is OFF at last scan

A is ON at last scan

OFF

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Device

Example

R100 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is ON and X003 changes to ON.

X000

X003

R100

1 scan time 1 scan time

Note

· The maximum usable number in a program is 2048.

total)

(

(P)

(N)

^{Basic Hardware and Function}143

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

Negative pulse contact

T1S only

Expression

Input

Output

Function

When the input is ON and the device A is changed from ON to OFF (ON at last scan and OFF at this

scan), the output is turned ON.

This instruction is used to detect the device changing from ON to OFF.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF Regardless of the state of device A

State of device A is OFF A is OFF at last scan

A is ON at last scan

State of device A is ON

OFF

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Device

Example

R100 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is ON and X003 changes to OFF.

X000

X003

R100

1 scan time 1 scan time

Note

· The maximum usable number in a program is 2048.

total)

(

(P)

(N)

144 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

( P )

Positive pulse coil

T1S only

Expression

Input ( P )

Function

When the input is changed form OFF to ON, the device A is set to ON for 1 scan time.

This instruction is used to detect the input changing from OFF to ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF Sets device A to OFF

When the input at last scan is OFF, sets A to ON

When the input at last scan is ON, sets A to OFF

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Device

Example

R101 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is changed from OFF to ON.

X000

R100

1 scan time

Note

· The maximum usable number in a program is 2048.

total)

(

(P)

(N)

^{Basic Hardware and Function}145

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

( N )

Negative pulse coil

T1S only

Expression

Input ( N )

Function

When the input is changed form ON to OFF, the device A is set to ON for 1 scan time.

This instruction is used to detect the input changing from ON to OFF.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF When the input at last scan is OFF, sets A to OFF

When the input at last scan is ON, sets A to ON

Sets device A to OFF

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Device

Example

R101 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is changed from ON to OFF.

X000

R100

1 scan time 1 scan time

Note

· The maximum usable number in a program is 2048.

total)

(

(P)

(N)

146 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

TON ON delay timer

Expression

Input ¾[ A TON B ]¾ Output

Function

When the input is changed from OFF to ON, timer updating for the timer register B is started. The

elapsed time is stored in B. When the specified time by A has elapsed after the input came ON, the

output and the timer device corresponding to B are turned ON. (Timer updating is stopped)

When the input is changed from ON to OFF, B is cleared to 0, and the output and the timer device are

turned OFF.

The available data range for operand A is 0 to 32767.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No operation (timer is not updating)

Elapsed time < preset time (timer is updating)

Elapsed time ³ preset time (timer is not updating)

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

0 - 32767

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Preset time

B Elapsed time

Example

Y021 (and the timer device T.000) is turned ON 2 seconds after X000 came ON.

X000

Note

Preset value

· Time is set in 10 ms units for;

T1: T000 to T031 (0 to 327.67 s)

T1S: T000 to T063 (0 to 327.67 s)

· Time is set in 100 ms units for;

T1: T032 to T063 (0 to 3276.7 s)

T1S: T064 to T255 (0 to 3276.7 s)

· Multiple timer instructions (TON, TOF or

SS) with the same timer register are not

allowed.

T000

T.000

Y021

Preset time (2s) Less than preset time

^{Basic Hardware and Function}147

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

TOF

OFF delay timer

Expression

Input ¾[ A TOF B ]¾ Output

Function

When the input is changed from OFF to ON, the output and the timer device corresponding to the

timer register B are set to ON. When the input is changed from ON to OFF, timer updating for B is

started. The elapsed time is stored in B. When the specified time by A has elapsed after the input

came OFF, the output and the timer device are turned OFF. (Timer updating is stopped)

The available data range for operand A is 0 to 32767.

Execution condition

Input

OFF

Operation

Output

OFF

Elapsed time < preset time (timer is updating)

Elapsed time ³ preset time (timer is not updating)

No operation (timer is not updating)

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

0 - 32767

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Preset time

B Elapsed time

Example

Y021 (and the timer device T.002) is turned OFF 1 second after X000 came OFF.

X000

Note

· Time is set in 10 ms units for;

T1: T000 to T031 (0 to 327.67 s)

T1S: T000 to T063 (0 to 327.67 s)

· Time is set in 100 ms units for;

T1: T032 to T063 (0 to 3276.7 s)

T1S: T064 to T255 (0 to 3276.7 s)

· Multiple timer instructions (TON, TOF or

SS) with the same timer register are not

allowed.

Preset value

T002

T.002

Y021

Preset time (1 s) Less than preset time

148 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

Single shot timer

Expression

Input ¾[ A SS B ]¾ Output

Function

When the input is changed from OFF to ON, the output and the timer device corresponding to the

timer register B are set to ON, and timer updating for B is started. The elapsed time is stored in B.

When the specified time by A has elapsed after the input came ON, the output and the timer device

are turned OFF. (Timer updating is stopped)

The available data range for operand A is 0 to 32767.

Execution condition

Input

OFF

Operation

Output

OFF

Elapsed time < preset time (timer is updating)

Elapsed time ³ preset time (timer is not updating)

Elapsed time < preset time (timer is updating)

Elapsed time ³ preset time (timer is not updating)

OFF

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

0 - 32767

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Preset time

B Elapsed time

Example

Y021 (and the timer device T.003) is turned OFF 1 second after X000 came ON.

X000

Note

· Time is set in 10 ms units for;

T1: T000 to T031 (0 to 327.67 s)

T1S: T000 to T063 (0 to 327.67 s)

· Time is set in 100 ms units for;

T1: T032 to T063 (0 to 3276.7 s)

T1S: T064 to T255 (0 to 3276.7 s)

· Multiple timer instructions (TON, TOF or

SS) with the same timer register are not

allowed.

Preset value

T003

T.003

Y021

Preset time (1 s)

^{Basic Hardware and Function}149

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

CNT

Counter

Expression

Count input

C CNT Q Output

E A B

Enable input

Function

While the enable input is ON, this instruction counts the number of the count input changes from OFF

to ON. The count value is stored in the counter register B. When the count value reaches the set value

A, the output and the counter device corresponding to B are turned ON. When the enable input comes

OFF, B is cleared to 0 and the output and the counter device are turned OFF.

The available data range for operand A is 0 to 65535.

Execution condition

Enable

input

Operation

Output

OFF No operation (B is cleared to 0)

OFF

Count value (B) < set value (A)

Count value (B) ³ set value (A)

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

0 - 65535

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Set value

B Count value

Example

Note

· No transitional contact is required for the

count input. The count input rising edge is

detected by this instruction.

· For the count input, direct linking to a

connecting point is not allowed. In this

case, insert a dummy contact (always ON =

S04F, etc.) just before the input.

Refer to Note of Shift register FUN 074.

· Multiple counter instructions (CNT) with the

same counter register are not allowed.

X001

X002

C010

C.010

Y021

150 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

MCS Master control set / reset

MCR

Expression

Input

[ MCS ]

[ MCR ]

Function

When the MCS input is ON, ordinary operation is performed. When the MCS input is OFF, the state of

left power rail between MCS and MCR is turned OFF.

Execution condition

MCS

input

Operation

Output

OFF Sets OFF the left power rail until MCR

ON Ordinary operation

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

When X000 is OFF, Y021 and Y022 are turned OFF regardless of the states of X001 and X002.

Equivalent circuit

X000

Note

· MCS and MCR must be used as a pair.

· Nesting is not allowed.

X001

X002

Y021

Y022

^{Basic Hardware and Function}151

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

JCS

JCR

Jump control set / reset

Expression

Input

[ JCS ]

[ JCR ]

Function

When the JCS input is ON, instructions between JCS and JCR are skipped (not executed). When the

JCS input is OFF, ordinary operation is performed.

Execution condition

JCS

Operation

Output

input

OFF Ordinary operation

Skips until JCR

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

When X000 is ON, the rung 2 circuit is skipped, therefore Y021 is not changed its state regardless

of the X001 state. When X000 is OFF, Y021 is controlled by the X001 state.

Note

· JCS and JCR must be used as a pair.

· Nesting is not allowed.

152 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

END End

Expression

[ END ]

Function

Indicates the end of main program or sub-program. Instructions after the END instruction are not

executed. At least one END instruction is necessary in a program.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

Note

· For debugging purpose, 2 or more END instructions can be written in a program.

· Instructions after END instruction are not executed. Those steps are, however, counted as used

steps.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}153

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 018

MOV

Data transfer

Expression

Input -[ A MOV B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A is stored in B.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

B Destination

Example 1 (constant to register)

When R010 is ON, a constant data (12345) is stored in D0100 and the output is turned ON.

Example 2 (register to register)

When X005 is ON, the data of SW30 is stored in RW45 and the output is turned ON. If SW30 is

500, the data 500 is stored in RW45.

Example 3 (index modification)

When R050 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW08 is stored in the index register I and the

data of D(0000+I) is stored in YW10. If RW08 is 300, the data of D0300 is stored in YW10.

154 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 019

DMOV Double-word data transfer

Expression

Input -[ A+1×A MOV B+1×B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word (32-bit) data of A+1×A is stored in double-word register B+1×B.

The data range is -2147483648 to 2147483647.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

B Destination

Example

When R011 is ON, a double-word data of D0101×D0100 is stored in RW17×RW16 and the output

is turned ON. If D0101×D0100 is 1234567, the data 1234567 is stored in RW17×RW16.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}155

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 020

NOT

Invert transfer

Expression

Input -[ A NOT B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the bit-inverted data of A is stored in B.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

B Destination

Example

When R010 is ON, the bit-inverted data of RW30 is stored in D0200 and the output is turned ON.

If RW30 is H4321, the bit-inverted data (HBCDE) is stored in D0200.

RW30 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

Bit-invert

D0200 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0

156 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 022

XCHG Data exchange

Expression

Input -[ A XCHG B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B is exchanged.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Operation data

B Operation data

Example

When R005 is ON, the data of RW23 and D0100 is exchanged. If the original data of RW23 is

23456 and that of D0100 is 291, the operation result is as follows.

RW23 23456

D0100 291

Before operation

RW23

D0100

291

23456

After operation

^{Basic Hardware and Function}157

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 024

TINZ

Table initialize

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A TINZ (n) B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A is stored in n registers starting with B.

The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 1024 words.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

n Table size

B Start of

destination

1 - 1024

Example

When R010 is ON, a constant data (0) is stored in 100 registers starting with D0200 (D0200 to

D0299) and the output is turned ON.

Constant

D0200

D0201

D0202

100 registers

D0299

158 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 025

TMOV Table transfer

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A TMOV (n) B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of n registers starting with A are transferred to n registers starting with

B in a block. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 1024 words.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

1 - 1024

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Start of source

n Table size

B Start of

destination

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0500 to D0509 (10 registers) are block transferred to D1000 to

D1009, and the output is turned ON.

D0500

D0501

D0502

1111

2222

3333

D1000

D1001

D1002

1111

2222

3333

Block transfer

10 registers

D0509

12345

D1009

12345

Note

· The source and destination tables can be overlapped.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}159

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 026

TNOT

Table invert transfer

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A TNOT (n) B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of n registers starting with A are bit-inverted and transferred to n

registers starting with B in a block. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 1024 words.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

1 - 1024

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Start of source

n Table size

B Start of

destination

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0600 to D0604 (5 registers) are bit-inverted and transferred to

D0865 to D0869, and the output is turned ON.

D0600

D0601

D0602

D0603

D0604

H00FF

H0000

H1234

H5555

H89AB

D0865

D0866

D0867

D0868

D0869

HFF00

HFFFF

HEDCB

HAAAA

H7654

Bit-invert

and transfer

5 registers

Note

· The source and destination tables can be overlapped.

160 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 027

Addition

Expression

Input -[ A + B ® C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are added, and the result is stored in C.

If the result is greater than 32767, the upper limit value 32767 is stored in C, and the output is turned

ON. If the result is smaller than -32768, the lower limit value -32768 is stored in C, and the output is

turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution (normal)

Execution (overflow or underflow occurred)

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Augend

B Addend

C Sum

Example

When R005 is ON, the data of D0100 and the constant data 1000 is added, and the result is

stored in D0110.

If the data of D0100 is 12345, the result 13345 is stored in D0110, and R010 is turned OFF.

D0100

12345

D0110

13345

R010 is OFF

Constant 1000

If the data of D0100 is 32700, the result exceeds the limit value, therefore 32767 is stored in

D0110, and R010 is turned ON.

D0100

32700

Overflow

D0110

32767

R010 is ON

Constant 1000

^{Basic Hardware and Function}161

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 028

Subtraction

Expression

Input -[ A - B ® C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of B is subtracted from the data of A, and the result is stored in C.

If the result is greater than 32767, the upper limit value 32767 is stored in C, and the output is turned

ON. If the result is smaller than -32768, the lower limit value -32768 is stored in C, and the output is

turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution (normal)

Execution (overflow or underflow occurred)

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Minuend

B Subtrahend

C Difference

Example

When R005 is ON, the constant data 2500 is subtracted from the data of D0200, and the result is

stored in RW50.

If the data of D0200 is 15000, the result 12500 is stored in RW50, and R010 is turned OFF.

D0200

15000

RW50

12500

R010 is OFF

Constant 2500

If the data of D0200 is -31000, the result is smaller than the limit value, therefore -32768 is stored

in RW50, and R010 is turned ON.

D0100

-31000

Underflow

RW50

-32768

R010 is ON

Constant 2500

162 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 029

Multiplication

Expression

Input -[ A * B ® C+1×C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A is multiplied by the data of B, and the result is stored in double-

length register C+1 C.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Multiplicand

B Multiplier

C Product

Example

When R005 is ON, the data of D0050 is multiplied by the data of RW05, and the result is stored in

double-length register D0101 D0100 (upper 16-bit in D0101 and lower 16-bit in D0100).

If the data of D0050 is 1500 and the data of RW05 is 20, the result 30000 is stored in

D0101 D0100.

D0050

RW05

1500

D0101 D0100

30000

D0101

D0100

H0000

H7530

(upper 16-bit)

(lower 16-bit)

^{Basic Hardware and Function}163

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 030

Division

Expression

Input -[ A / B ® C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A is divided by the data of B, and the quotient is stored in C and the

remainder in C+1.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

ERF

OFF No execution

Normal execution (B ¹ 0)

No execution (B = 0)

OFF

Set

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Dividend

B Divisor

C Quotient

Example

When R005 is ON, the data of RW22 is divided by the constant data 325, and the quotient is

stored in RW27 and the remainder is stored in RW28.

If the data of RW22 is 2894, the quotient 8 is stored in RW27 and the remainder 294 is stored in

RW28.

RW22

2894

325

RW27

RW28

294

(quotient)

(remainder)

Constant

Note

· If divisor (operand B) is 0, ERF (instruction error flag = S051) is set to ON.

The ERF (S051) can be reset to OFF by user program, e.g. Ä[ RST S051 ]Ä.

· If the index register K is used as operand C, the remainder is ignored.

· If operand A is -32768 and operand B is -1, the data -32768 is stored in C and 0 is stored in C+1.

164 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 031

D+

Double-word addition

Expression

Input -[ A+1×A D+ B+1×B ® C+1×C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1×A and B+1×B are added, and the result is stored in

C+1×C. The data range is -2147483648 to 2147483647.

If the result is greater than 2147483647, the upper limit value 2147483647 is stored in C+1×C, and the

output is turned ON. If the result is smaller than -2147483648, the lower limit value

-2147483648 is stored in C+1×C, and the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution (normal)

Execution (overflow or underflow occurred)

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Augend

B Addend

C Sum

Example

When R005 is ON, the data of D0011×D0010 and the constant data 100000 is added, and the

result is stored in D0101×D0100.

If the data of D0011×D0010 is 300000, the result 400000 is stored in D0101×D0100, and R010 is

turned OFF. (No overflow/underflow)

D0011×D0010

300000

100000

D0101×D0100

400000

R010 is OFF

Constant

^{Basic Hardware and Function}165

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 032

Double-word subtraction

D-

Expression

Input -[ A+1×A D- B+1×B ® C+1×C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of B+1 B is subtracted from A+1 A, and the result is

stored in C+1 C. The data range is -2147483648 to 2147483647.

If the result is greater than 2147483647, the upper limit value 2147483647 is stored in C+1 C, and the

output is turned ON. If the result is smaller than -2147483648, the lower limit value

-2147483648 is stored in C+1 C, and the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution (normal)

Execution (overflow or underflow occurred)

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Minuend

B Subtrahend

C Difference

Example

When R005 is ON, the double-word data of RW25 RW24 is subtracted from the double-word data

of D0101 D0100, and the result is stored in D0103 D0102.

If the data of D0101 D0100 is 1580000 and the data of RW25 RW24 is 80000, the result 1500000

is stored in D0103 D0102, and R010 is turned OFF. (No overflow/underflow)

D0101 D0100

1580000

80000

D0103 D0102

1500000

R010 is OFF

RW25 RW24

166 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 035

Addition with carry

Expression

Input -[ A +C B ® C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A, B and the carry flag (CF = S050) are added, and the result is

stored in C. If carry is occurred in the operation, the carry flag is set to ON. If the result is greater than

32767 or smaller than -32768, the output is turned ON.

This instruction is used to perform unsigned addition or double-length addition.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

Reset

Set

Reset

Set

OFF No execution

Execution Normal

No carry

Carry occurred

Overflow / No carry

underflow Carry occurred

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Augend

B Addend

C Sum

Example

When R013 is ON, the data of double-length registers D0101×D0100 and RW21×RW20 are

added, and the result is stored in D0201×D0200. The RSTC is a instruction to reset the carry flag

before starting the calculation.

If the data of D0101×D0100 is 12345678 and RW21×RW20 is 54322, the result 12400000 is stored

in D0201×D0200.

D0101×D0100 12345678

D0201×D0200

12400000

RW21×RW20

54322

^{Basic Hardware and Function}167

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 036

-C

Subtraction with carry

Expression

Input -[ A -C B ® C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of B and the carry flag (CF = S050) are subtracted from A, and the

result is stored in C. If borrow is occurred in the operation, the carry flag is set to ON. If the result is

greater than 32767 or smaller than -32768, the output is turned ON.

This instruction is used to perform unsigned subtraction or double-length subtraction.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

Reset

Set

Reset

Set

OFF No execution

Execution Normal

No borrow

Borrow occurred

Overflow / No borrow

underflow Borrow occurred

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Minuend

B Subtrahend

C Difference

Example

When R013 is ON, the data of double-length register RW23×RW22 is subtracted from the data of

D0201×D0200, and the result is stored in D0211×D0210. The RSTC is a instruction to reset the

carry flag before starting the calculation.

If the data of D0201×D0200 is 12345678 and RW23×RW22 is 12340000, the result 5678 is stored

in D0211×D0210.

D0201×D0200 12345678

D0211×D0210

5678

RW23×RW22 12340000

168 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 039

Unsigned multiplication

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A U* B ® C+1×C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the unsigned data of A and B are multiplied, and the result is stored in

double-length register C+1 C. The data range of A and B is 0 to 65535 (unsigned 16-bit data)

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Multiplicand

B Multiplier

C Product

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0050 is multiplied by the data of RW05, and the result is stored in

double-length register D0101 D0100 (upper 16-bit in D0101 and lower 16-bit in D0100).

If the data of D0050 is 52500 and the data of RW05 is 30, the result 1575000 is stored in

D0101 D0100.

D0050

RW05

52500

D0101 D0100

1575000

Note

This instruction handles the register data as unsigned integer.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}169

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 040

Unsigned division

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A U/ B ® C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the unsigned data of A is divided by the unsigned data of B, and the quotient is

stored in C and the remainder in C+1. The data range of A and B is 0 to 65535 (unsigned 16-bit data)

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

ERF

OFF No execution

Normal execution (B ¹ 0)

No execution (B = 0)

OFF

Set

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Dividend

B Divisor

C Quotient

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0030 is divided by the constant data 300, and the quotient is

stored in D0050 and the remainder is stored in D0051.

If the data of D0030 is 54321, the quotient 181 is stored in D0050 and the remainder 21 is stored

in D0051.

D0030

54321

300

RW27

RW28

181

(quotient)

(remainder)

Constant

Note

· If divisor (operand B) is 0, ERF (instruction error flag = S051) is set to ON.

The ERF (S051) can be reset to OFF by user program, e.g. -[ RST S051 ]-.

· If the index register K is used as operand C, the remainder is ignored.

· This instruction handles the register data as unsigned integer.

170 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 041

DIV

Unsigned double/single division

Expression

Input -[ A+1×A DIV B ® C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1×A is divided by the data of B, and the quotient is

stored in C and the remainder in C+1. The data range of A+1×A is 0 to 4294967295, and the data range

of B and C is 0 to 65535.

If the quotient is greater than 65535 (overflow), the limit value 65535 is stored in C, 0 is stored in C+1,

and the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

ERF

OFF No execution

Normal execution (B ¹ 0)

Set

Overflow (B ¹ 0)

OFF

Set

No execution (B = 0)

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Dividend

B Divisor

C Quotient

Example

When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0201×D0200 is divided by the constant data 4000,

and the quotient is stored in D1000 and the remainder is stored in D1001.

If the data of D0201×D0200 is 332257, the quotient 83 is stored in D1000 and the remainder 257

is stored in D1001.

D0201×D0200

332257

4000

D1000

D1001

83 (quotient)

257 (remainder)

Constant

Note

· If divisor (operand B) is 0, ERF (instruction error flag = S051) is set to ON.

The ERF (S051) can be reset to OFF by user program, e.g. -[ RST S051 ]-.

· This instruction handles the register data as unsigned integer.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}171

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 043

Increment

Expression

Input -[ +1 A ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A is increased by 1 and stored in A.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Operation data

Example

At the rising edge of X004 changes from OFF to ON, the data of D0050 is increased by 1 and

stored in D0050.

If the data of D0050 is 750 before the execution, it will be 751 after the execution.

D0050

750

D0050

751

+ 1

Note

· There is no limit value for this instruction. When the data of operand A is 32767 before the

execution, it will be -32768 after the execution.

172 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 045

-1

Decrement

Expression

Input -[ -1 A ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A is decreased by 1 and stored in A.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Operation data

Example

At the rising edge of X005 changes from OFF to ON, the data of D0050 is decreased by 1 and

stored in D0050.

If the data of D0050 is 1022 before the execution, it will be 1021 after the execution.

D0050

1022

D0050

1021

- 1

Note

· There is no limit value for this instruction. When the data of operand A is -32768 before the

execution, it will be 32767 after the execution.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}173

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 048

AND

Expression

Input -[ A AND B ® C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds logical AND of A and B, and stores the result in C.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

B Source

C AND

Example

When R012 is ON, logical AND operation is executed for the data of RW12 and the constant data

HFF00, and the result is stored in D0030.

If the data of RW12 is H3456, the result H3400 is stored in D0030.

RW12

0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0

AND

Constant 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D0030

0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

174 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 050

Expression

Input -[ A OR B ® C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds logical OR of A and B, and stores the result in C.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

B source

C OR

Example

When R012 is ON, logical OR operation is executed for the data of RW13 and RW20, and the

result is stored in D0031.

If the data of RW13 is H5678 and RW20 is H4321, the result H5779 is stored in D0031.

RW13

RW20

D0031

0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

^{Basic Hardware and Function}175

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 052

EOR

Exclusive OR

Expression

Input -[ A EOR B ® C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds exclusive OR of A and B, and stores the result in C.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

B source

C Exclusive OR

Example

When R012 is ON, exclusive OR operation is executed for the data of D1000 and D0300, and the

result is stored in D1000.

If the data of D1000 is H5678 and D0300 is H4321, the result H1559 is stored in D1000.

D1000

D0300

D1000

0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

Exclusive OR

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1

176 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 056

MAVE Moving average

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A MAVE (n) B ® C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction calculates the average value of the latest n scan’s register A

data, and stores it in C. The allowable range of n is 1 to 64.

This instruction is useful for filtering the analog input signal.

The latest n scan’s data of A are stored in n registers starting with B, and C+1 are used as pointer.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Input data

n Data size

1 - 64

B Start of table

C Output data

Example

The latest 5 scan’s data of XW04 is stored in D0900 to D0904 (5 registers), and the average value

of them is calculated and stored in D0010.

D0011 is used as internal work data.

XW04

1000

D0010

200 = (1000) / 5

1st scan

2nd scan

3rd scan

4th scan

5th scan

6th scan

7th scan

8th scan

1005

1009

1012

1007

1004

998

401 = (1000 + 1005) / 5

603 = (1000 + 1005 + 1009) / 5

805 = (1000 + 1005 + 1009 + 1012) / 5

1006 = (1000 + 1005 + 1009 + 1012 + 1007) / 5

1007 = (1005 + 1009 + 1012 + 1007 + 1004) / 5

1006 = (1009 + 1012 + 1007 + 1004 + 998) / 5

1003 = (1012 + 1007 + 1004 + 998 + 994) / 5

994

^{Basic Hardware and Function}177

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 061

DFL

Digital Filter

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A DFL B ® C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction calculates the following formula to perform digital filtering for

input data A by filter constant by B, and stores the result in C.

ⁿ=

1 FL

ⁿ+

n - 1

(

)

Here; xⁿis input data specified by A

FL is filter constant, 1/10000 of data specified by B (data range: 0 to 9999)

yⁿis output data to be stored in C

y^n-1is output data at last scan

This instruction is useful for filtering the analog input signal. C+1 is used for internal work data.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution (FL is limited within the range of 0 to 9999)

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Input data

B Filter constant

C Output data

Example

The filtered data of XW04 is stored in D0110. (D0111 is used for internal work data)

When D0100 value is small

XW04

When D0100 value is large

XW04

D0110

Time

178 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 062

HTOA

Hex to ASCII conversion

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A HTOA (n) B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the hexadecimal data of n registers starting with A is converted into ASCII

characters and stored in B and after. The uppermost digit of source A is stored in lower byte of

destination B, and followed in this order. The allowable range of n is 1 to 32.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

n Data size

B Destination

1 - 32

Example

When R010 is ON, 4 words data of D0100 to D0103 are converted into ASCII characters, and

stored in 8 words registers starting with D0200.

D0100

D0101

D0102

D0103

H0123

H4567

H89AB

HCDEF

D0220

D0221

D0222

D0223

D0224

D0225

D0226

D0227

“1” (H31)

“3” (H33)

“5” (H35)

“7” (H37)

“9” (H39)

“B” (H42)

“0” (H30)

“2” (H32)

Converted

“4” (H34)

“6” (H36)

“8” (H38)

“A” (H41)

“C” (H43)

“E” (H45)

“D” (H44)

“F” (H46)

Note

· If index register (I, J or K) is used for the operand A, only n = 1 is allowed. Otherwise, boundary

error will occur.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}179

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 063

ATOH

ASCII to Hex conversion

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A ATOH (n) B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the ASCII characters stored in n registers starting with A is converted into

hexadecimal data and stored in B and after. The lower byte of source A is stored as uppermost digit of

destination B, and followed in this order. The allowable ASCII character in the source table is “0” (H30)

to “9” (H39) and “A” (H41) to “F” (H46). The allowable range of n is 1 to 64.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

ERF

OFF No execution

Normal execution

Conversion data error (no execution)

OFF

Set

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

n Data size

B Destination

1 - 64

Example

When R011 is ON, the ASCII characters stored in 8 words of D0300 to D0307 are converted into

hexadecimal data, and stored in 4 words registers starting with RW040.

D0300

D0301

D0302

D0303

D0304

D0305

D0306

D0307

“1” (H31)

“0” (H30)

RW040

RW041

RW042

RW043

H0123

H4567

H89AB

HCDEF

“3” (H33)

“5” (H35)

“7” (H37)

“9” (H39)

“B” (H42)

“2” (H32)

“4” (H34)

“6” (H36)

“8” (H38)

“A” (H41)

“C” (H43)

“E” (H45)

Converted

“D” (H44)

“F” (H46)

Note

· If index register (I, J or K) is used for the operand A, only n = 1 is allowed.

· If n is odd number, lower 2 digits of the last converted data will not be fixed, Use even for n.

180 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 064

TEST

Bit test

Expression

Input -[ A TEST B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds logical AND of A and B. Then if the result is not 0, sets the

output to ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution When the result is not 0

When the result is 0

OFF

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

B Test data

Example

Logical AND operation is executed for the data of RW07 and the constant data H0FFF, and if the

result is not 0, R00A is turned ON. (R00A is turned ON when any device from R070 to R07B is

ON.)

If the data of RW07 is H4008, R00A is turned ON.

RW07

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

AND

Constant 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Result is not 0

Result

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

R00A comes ON

^{Basic Hardware and Function}181

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 068

SHR1

1 bit shift right

Expression

Input -[ SHR1 A ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted 1 bit to the right (LSB direction). 0 is stored in the

left most bit (MSB). The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the operation,

if the right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

Set or reset

OFF No execution

Execution When LSB = 1

When LSB = 0

OFF

Set or reset

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Operation data

Example

When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is shifted 1 bit to the right.

The figure below shows an operation example.

(MSB)

(LSB)

RW15

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

RW15

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

(Result)

R001 is turned ON

182 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 069

SHL1

1 bit shift left

Expression

Input -[ SHL1 A ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted 1 bit to the left (MSB direction). 0 is stored in the

right most bit (LSB). The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the

operation, if the left most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

Set or reset

OFF No execution

Execution When MSB = 1

When MSB = 0

OFF

Set or reset

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Operation data

Example

When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is shifted 1 bit to the left.

The figure below shows an operation example.

(MSB)

(LSB)

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

RW15

RW15 (Result)

1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0

R002 is turned ON

^{Basic Hardware and Function}183

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 070

SHR

n bit shift right

Expression

Input -[ A SHR n ® B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted n bits to the right (LSB direction) including the

carry flag (CF = S050), and stored in B. 0 is stored in upper n bits. After the operation, if the right most

bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

Set or reset

OFF No execution

Execution When LSB = 1

When LSB = 0

OFF

Set or reset

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

n Shift bits

B Destination

1 - 16

Example

When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is shifted 5 bits to the right and the

result is stored in RW20.

The figure below shows an operation example.

(MSB)

(LSB)

RW18

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0

RW20

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

(Result)

R001 is turned OFF

184 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 071

SHL

n bit shift left

Expression

Input -[ A SHL n ® B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted n bits to the left (MSB direction) including the

carry flag (CF = S050), and stored in B. 0 is stored in lower n bits. After the operation, if the left most bit

(MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

Set or reset

OFF No execution

Execution When MSB = 1

When MSB = 0

OFF

Set or reset

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

n Shift bits

B Destination

1 - 16

Example

When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is shifted 3 bits to the left and the

result is stored in RW20.

The figure below shows an operation example.

(MSB)

(LSB)

1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

RW18

RW20 (Result)

0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0

R002 is turned OFF

^{Basic Hardware and Function}185

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 074

Shift register

Expression

Data input

Shift input

- ^DSR ^Q- Output

- ^S(n)

Enable input - ^E

Function

While the enable input is ON, this instruction shifts the data of the bit table, size n starting with A,

1 bit to the left (upper address direction) when the shift input is ON. The state of the data input is stored

in A. The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050).

When the enable input is OFF, all bits in the table and the carry flag are reset to OFF.

Execution condition

Enable

input

Operation

Output

OFF Resets all bits in the bit table

OFF

Last bit

state

Reset

Set or reset

When the shift input is ON

When the shift input is OFF

Shift execution

No execution

Operand

Name

Device

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

Constant Index

1 - 64

A Leading device

n Device size

Example

32 devices starting with R100 (R100 to R11F) is specified as a shift register.

When R010 is OFF, the data of the shift register is reset to 0. (R100 to R11F are reset to OFF)

The carry flag (CF = S050) is also reset to OFF.

While R010 is ON, the data of the shift register is shifted 1 bit to the upper address direction when

X009 is changed from OFF to ON. At the same time, the state of X008 is stored in the leading bit

(R100).

The output (R011) indicates the state of the last bit (R11F).

186 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

The figure below shows an operation example. (When X009 is changed from OFF to ON)

R11F R11E R11D R11C

R103 R102 R101 R100

X008

Shift result

R011 is turned OFF

Note

· When the shift input is ON, the shift operation is performed every scan. Use a transitional contact

for the shift input to detect the state changing.

· For the data input and the shift input, direct linking to a connecting point is not allowed. In this case,

insert a dummy contact (always ON special device = S04F, etc.) just before the input.

( )

^DSR

^S(n)

Not allowed

Dummy contact

( )

^DSR

^S(n)

Allowed

^{Basic Hardware and Function}187

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 075

DSR

Bi-directional shift register

Expression

Data input

Shift input

Enable input

- ^DDSR ^Q- Output

- ^S(n)

- ^E

Direction input - ^L

Function

While the enable input (E) is ON, this instruction shifts the data of the bit table, size n starting with A,

1 bit when the shift input (S) is ON. The shift direction is determined by the state of the direction input

(L).

When L is OFF, the direction is right (lower address direction).

When L is ON, the direction is left (upper address direction).

The state of the data input (D) is stored in the highest bit if right shift, and stored in the lowest bit A if left

shift. The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050).

When the enable input (E) is OFF, all bits in the table and the carry flag are reset to OFF.

Execution condition

Enable

input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF Resets all bits in the bit table

Reset

S = ON

L = ON

L = OFF

Shift left execution

Shift right execution

Highest bit state Set or reset

Lowest bit state Set or reset

S = OFF No execution

Highest bit state

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

1 - 64

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Leading device

n Device size

Example

188 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

9 devices starting with R200 (R200 to R208) is specified as a shift register.

When R010 is OFF, the data of the shift register is reset to 0. (R200 to R208 are reset to OFF)

The carry flag (CF = S050) is also reset to OFF.

While R010 is ON the following operation is enabled.

· When X00A is ON (shift left), the data of the shift register is shifted 1 bit to the upper address

direction when X009 is changed from OFF to ON. At the same time, the state of X008 is stored

in the leading bit (R200). The output (R012) indicates the state of the highest bit (R208).

· When X00A is OFF (shift right), the data of the shift register is shifted 1 bit to the lower address

direction when X009 is changed from OFF to ON. At the same time, the state of X008 is stored

in the highest bit (R208). The output (R012) indicates the state of the lowest bit (R200).

The figure below shows an operation example.

(When X00A is ON and X009 is changed from OFF to ON)

R208 R207 R206 R205 R204 R203 R202 R201 R200

X008

Shift result

R012 is turned OFF

(When X00A is OFF and X009 is changed from OFF to ON)

X008

R208 R207 R206 R205 R204 R203 R202 R201 R200

Shift result

R012 is turned ON

Note

· When the shift input is ON, the shift operation is performed every scan. Use a transitional contact

for the shift input to detect the state changing.

· For the data input, the shift input and the enable input, direct linking to a connecting point is not

allowed. In this case, insert a dummy contact (always ON special device = S04F, etc.) just before

the input. Refer to Note of Shift register FUN 074.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}189

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 078

RTR1

1 bit rotate right

Expression

Input -[ RTR1 A ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated 1 bit to the right (LSB direction). The pushed out

bit state is stored in the left most bit (MSB) and in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the operation, if the

right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

Set or reset

OFF No execution

Execution When LSB = 1

When LSB = 0

OFF

Set or reset

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Operation data

Example

When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is rotated 1 bit to the right.

The figure below shows an operation example.

(MSB)

(LSB)

RW15

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

RW15

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

(Result)

R001 is turned ON

190 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 079

RTL1

1 bit rotate left

Expression

Input -[ RTL1 A ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated 1 bit to the left (MSB direction). The pushed out

bit state is stored in the right most bit (LSB) and in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the operation, if the

left most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

Set or reset

OFF No execution

Execution When MSB = 1

When MSB = 0

OFF

Set or reset

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Operation data

Example

When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is rotated 1 bit to the left.

The figure below shows an operation example.

(MSB)

(LSB)

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1

R002 is turned ON

RW15

RW15 (Result)

^{Basic Hardware and Function}191

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 080

RTR

n bit rotate right

Expression

Input -[ A RTR n ® B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated n bits to the right (LSB direction), and stored in

B. After the operation, if the right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

Set or reset

OFF No execution

Execution When LSB = 1

When LSB = 0

OFF

Set or reset

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

n Shift bits

B Destination

1 - 16

Example

When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is rotated 5 bits to the right and the

result is stored in RW20.

The figure below shows an operation example.

(MSB)

(LSB)

RW18

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0

RW20

1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

(Result)

R001 is turned OFF

192 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 081

RTL

n bit rotate left

Expression

Input -[ A RTL n ® B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated n bits to the left (MSB direction), and stored in

B. After the operation, if the left most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

Set or reset

OFF No execution

Execution When MSB = 1

When MSB = 0

OFF

Set or reset

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

n Shift bits

B Destination

1 - 16

Example

When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is rotated 3 bits to the left and the

result is stored in RW20.

The figure below shows an operation example.

(MSB)

(LSB)

1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

R002 is turned OFF

RW18

RW20 (Result)

^{Basic Hardware and Function}193

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 090

MPX

Multiplexer

Expression

Input -[ A MPX (n) B ® C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of the register which is designated by B in the table, size n starting with

A, is transferred to C.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Normal execution

Pointer over (no execution)

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Start of table

n Table size

B Pointer

1 - 64

0 - 63

C Destination

Example

When R010 is ON, the register data which is designated by RW30 is read from the table D0500 to

D0509 (10 registers size), and stored in D0005.

If the data of RW30 is 7, D0507 data is transferred to D0005.

Source table

D0500

D0501

Pointer

Destination

D0005

12345

D0507

D0508

D0509

12345

Note

· If the pointer data designates outside the table (10 or more in the above example), the transfer is

not executed and the output comes ON.

· The table must be within the effective range of the register address.

194 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 091

DPX

Demultiplexer

Expression

Input -[ A DPX (n) B ® C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A is transferred to the register which is designated by B in the table,

size n starting with C.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Normal execution

Pointer over (no execution)

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

n Table size

B Pointer

C Start of table

1 - 64

0 - 63

Example

When R011 is ON, the data of XW04 is transferred to the register which is designated by RW30 in

the table D0500 to D0509 (10 registers size).

If the data of RW30 is 8, XW04 data is transferred to D0508.

Source

XW04

Destination table

D0500

Pointer

3210

D0501

D0507

D0508

D0509

3210

Note

· If the pointer data designates outside the table (10 or more in the above example), the transfer is

not executed and the output comes ON.

· The table must be within the effective range of the register address.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}195

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 096

Greater than

Expression

Input -[ A > B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than B, the

output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

A > B

OFF

A £ B

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Compared

data

B Reference data

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 2500, and if the data of

D0125 is greater than 2500, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 3000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125

If the data of D0125 is -100, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 -100 Constant 2500 R020 is OFF

3000

Constant 2500

R020 is ON

Note

This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

196 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 097

Greater than or equal

Expression

Input -[ A >= B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than or equal

to B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

A ³ B

OFF

A < B

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Compared

data

B Reference data

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0020, and if the data of

D0125 is greater than or equal to the data of D0020, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 3000 and that of D0020 is 3000, the comparison result is true.

Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125

3000

D0020

3000

R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is -1500 and that of D0020 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently,

R020 is turned OFF.

D0125

-1500

D0020

R020 is OFF

Note

This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

^{Basic Hardware and Function}197

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 098

Equal

Expression

Input -[ A = B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is equal to B, the output

is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

A = B

OFF

A ¹ B

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Compared

data

B Reference data

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0030, and if the data of

D0125 is equal to the data of D0030, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 3000 and that of D0020 is 3000, the comparison result is true.

Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125

3000

D0030

3000

R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is -1500 and that of D0020 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently,

R020 is turned OFF.

D0125

-1500

D0030

R020 is OFF

Note

This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

198 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 099

Not equal

Expression

Input -[ A <> B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is not equal to B, the

output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

A ¹ B

OFF

A = B

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Compared

data

B Reference data

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 0, and if the data of

D0125 is not 0, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 10, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125

If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 Constant R020 is OFF

Constant

R020 is ON

Note

This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

^{Basic Hardware and Function}199

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 100

Less than

Expression

Input -[ A < B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is less than B, the output

is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

A < B

OFF

A ³ B

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Compared

data

B Reference data

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0040, and if the data of

D0125 is less than the data of D0040, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 10 and that of D0040 is 15, the comparison result is true. Consequently,

R020 is turned ON.

D0125

D0040

R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 0 and that of D0040 is -50, the comparison result is false. Consequently,

R020 is turned OFF.

D0125

D0040

R020 is OFF

Note

This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

200 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 101

Less than or equal

Expression

Input -[ A <= B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is less than or equal to

B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

A £ B

OFF

A > B

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Compared

data

B Reference data

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data -100, and if the data of

D0125 is less than or equal to -100, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is -150, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125

If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 Constant -100 R020 is OFF

-150

Constant

-100

R020 is ON

Note

This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

^{Basic Hardware and Function}201

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 102

Double-word greater than

Expression

Input -[ A+1×A D> B+1×B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1 A and B+1 B are compared, and if A+1 A is greater

than B+1 B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

A+1×A > B+1×B

OFF

A+1×A £ B+1×B

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Compared

data

B Reference data

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0101 D0100 is compared with the constant data 200000, and if

the data of D0101 D0100 is greater than 200000, R014 is turned ON.

If the data of D0101 D0100 is 250000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R014 is

turned ON.

D0101 D0100

250000

Constant

200000

R014 is ON

If the data of D0101 D0100 is -100, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R014 is turned

OFF.

D0101 D0100

-100

Constant

200000

R014 is OFF

Note

This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

202 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 103

Double-word greater than or equal

D>=

Expression

Input -[ A+1×A D>= B+1×B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1 A and B+1 B are compared, and if A+1 A is greater

than or equal to B+1 B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

A+1×A ³ B+1×B

OFF

A+1×A < B+1×B

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Compared

data

B Reference data

Example

When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0101 D0100 is compared with the double-word data

of D0251 D0250, and if the data of D0101 D0100 is greater than or equal to the data of

D0251 D0250, R014 is turned ON.

If the data of D0101 D0100 is 250000 and D0251 D0250 is 200000, R014 is turned ON.

D0101 D0100

250000

D0251 D0250

200000

R014 is ON

If the data of D0101 D0100 is -100 and D0251 D0250 is 0, R014 is turned OFF.

D0101 D0100

-100

D0251 D0250

R014 is OFF

Note

This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

^{Basic Hardware and Function}203

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 104

Double-word equal

Expression

Input -[ A+1×A D= B+1×B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1 A and B+1 B are compared, and if A+1 A is equal

to B+1 B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

A+1×A = B+1×B

OFF

A+1×A ¹ B+1×B

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Compared

data

B Reference data

Example

When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0101 D0100 is compared with the double-word data

of D0251 D0250, and if the data of D0101 D0100 is equal to the data of D0251 D0250, R014 is

turned ON.

If the data of D0101 D0100 is 250000 and D0251 D0250 is 250000, R014 is turned ON.

D0101 D0100

250000

D0251 D0250

250000

R014 is ON

If the data of D0101 D0100 is -100 and D0251 D0250 is 0, R014 is turned OFF.

D0101 D0100

-100

D0251 D0250

R014 is OFF

Note

This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

204 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 105

Double-word not equal

D<>

Expression

Input -[ A+1×A D<> B+1×B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1 A and B+1 B are compared, and if A+1 A is not

equal to B+1 B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

A+1×A ¹ B+1×B

OFF

A+1×A = B+1×B

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Compared

data

B Reference data

Example

When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0101 D0100 is compared with the double-word data

of D0251 D0250, and if the data of D0101 D0100 is not equal to the data of D0251 D0250, R014

is turned ON.

If the data of D0101 D0100 is 250000 and D0251 D0250 is 200000, R014 is turned ON.

D0101 D0100

250000

D0251 D0250

250000

R014 is ON

If the data of D0101 D0100 is -100 and D0251 D0250 is -100, R014 is turned OFF.

D0101 D0100

-100

D0251 D0250

-100

R014 is OFF

Note

This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

^{Basic Hardware and Function}205

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 106

Double-word less than

Expression

Input -[ A+1×A D< B+1×B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1 A and B+1 B are compared, and if A+1 A is less

than B+1 B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

A+1×A < B+1×B

OFF

A+1×A ³ B+1×B

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Compared

data

B Reference data

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0101 D0100 is compared with the constant data 427780, and if

the data of D0101 D0100 is less than 427780, R014 is turned ON.

If the data of D0101 D0100 is 250000, R014 is turned ON.

D0101 D0100

250000

Constant

427780

R014 is ON

R014 is OFF

If the data of D0101 D0100 is 430000, R014 is turned OFF.

D0101 D0100

430000

Constant

427780

Note

This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

206 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 107

Double-word less than or equal

D<=

Expression

Input -[ A+1×A D<= B+1×B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1 A and B+1 B are compared, and if A+1 A is less

than or equal to B+1 B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

A+1×A £ B+1×B

OFF

A+1×A > B+1×B

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Compared

data

B Reference data

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0101 D0100 is compared with the constant data 0, and if the data

of D0101 D0100 is less than or equal to 0, R014 is turned ON.

If the data of D0101 D0100 is -1, R014 is turned ON.

D0101 D0100

-1

Constant

R014 is ON

R014 is OFF

If the data of D0101 D0100 is 10000, R014 is turned OFF.

D0101 D0100

10000

Constant

Note

This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

^{Basic Hardware and Function}207

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 108

Unsigned greater than

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A U> B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than B, the

output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

A > B

OFF

A £ B

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Compared

data

B Reference data

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 40000, and if the data

of D0125 is greater than 40000, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 52000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125

If the data of D0125 is 21000, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 21000 Constant 40000 R020 is OFF

52000

Constant 40000

R020 is ON

Note

This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).

208 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 109

Unsigned greater than or equal

U>=

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A >= B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than or equal

to B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

A ³ B

OFF

A < B

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Compared

data

B Reference data

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0020, and if the data of

D0125 is greater than or equal to the data of D0020, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 40000 and that of D0020 is 40000, the comparison result is true.

Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125

40000

D0020

40000

R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 15000 and that of D0020 is 20000, the comparison result is false.

Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125

15000

D0020

20000

R020 is OFF

Note

This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).

^{Basic Hardware and Function}209

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 110

Unsigned equal

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A U= B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is equal to B, the output

is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

A = B

OFF

A ¹ B

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Compared

data

B Reference data

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0030, and if the data of

D0125 is equal to the data of D0030, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 35000 and that of D0020 is 35000, the comparison result is true.

Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125

35000

D0030

35000

R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 1500 and that of D0020 is 4000, the comparison result is false.

Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125

1500

D0030

4000

R020 is OFF

Note

This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).

210 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 111

Unsigned not equal

U<>

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A U<> B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is not equal to B, the

output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

A ¹ B

OFF

A = B

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Compared

data

B Reference data

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 0, and if the data of

D0125 is not 0, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 41000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 41000 Constant R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 Constant R020 is OFF

Note

This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).

^{Basic Hardware and Function}211

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 112

Unsigned less than

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A U< B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is less than B, the output

is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

A < B

OFF

A ³ B

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Compared

data

B Reference data

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0040, and if the data of

D0125 is less than the data of D0040, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 43000 and that of D0040 is 45000, the comparison result is true.

Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125

43000

D0040

45000

R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 50000 and that of D0040 is 50000, the comparison result is false.

Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125

50000

D0040

50000

R020 is OFF

Note

This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).

212 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 113

Unsigned less than or equal

U<=

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A U<= B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is less than or equal to

B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

A £ B

OFF

A > B

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Compared

data

B Reference data

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 35000, and if the data

of D0125 is less than or equal to 35000, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 35000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125

If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 38000 Constant 35000 R020 is OFF

35000

Constant 35000

R020 is ON

Note

This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).

^{Basic Hardware and Function}213

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 114

SET

Device/register set

Expression

Input -[ SET A ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the device A is set to ON if A is a device, or the data HFFFF is stored in the

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Device or

Example 1 (device set)

When R010 is ON, R025 is set to ON. The state of R025 is remained even if R010 comes OFF.

Example 2 (register set)

When R010 is ON, the data HFFFF is stored in RW20. (R200 to R20F are set to ON)

The state of RW20 is remained even if R010 comes OFF.

214 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 115

RST

Device/register reset

Expression

Input -[ RST A ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the device A is reset to OFF if A is a device, or the data 0 is stored in the register

A if A is a register.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Device or

Example 1 (device reset)

When R011 is ON, R005 is reset to OFF. The state of R025 is remained even if R011 comes OFF.

Example 2 (register reset)

When R011 is ON, the data 0 is stored in RW20. (R200 to R20F are reset to OFF)

The state of RW20 is remained even if R011 comes OFF.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}215

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 118

SETC

Set carry

Expression

Input -[ SETC ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the carry flag (CF = S050) is set to ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

Set

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

When R011 is changed from OFF to ON, the carry flag S050 is set to ON.

216 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 119

RSTC

Reset carry

Expression

Input -[ RSTC ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the carry flag (CF = S050) is reset to OFF.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

Reset

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

When R010 is changed from OFF to ON, the carry flag S050 is reset to OFF.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}217

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 120

ENC

Encode

Expression

Input -[ A ENC (n) B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds the bit position of the most significant ON bit in the bit table,

size 2ⁿbits starting with 0 bit (LSB) of A, and stores it in B.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

ERF

OFF No execution

Normal execution

There is no ON bit (no execution)

OFF

Set

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

1 - 8

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Start of table

n Table size

B Encode result

Example

2⁵(=32) bits starting with 0 bit of RW05 (R050 to R06F) are defined as the bit table.

When R010 is ON, the most significant ON (1) bit position in the bit table is searched, and the

position is stored in D0010.

The following figure shows an operation example.

RW06

RW05

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

0 0 1 0

D0010

Note

· If there is no ON bit in the bit table, the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

218 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 121

DEC

Decode

Expression

Input -[ A DEC (n) B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction sets the bit position which is designated by lower n bits of A to

ON in the bit table, size 2ⁿbits starting with 0 bit (LSB) of B, and resets all other bits to OFF.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Device

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Constant Index

1 - 8

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Decode source

n Table size

B Start of table

Example

2⁵(=32) bits starting with 0 bit of RW05 (R050 to R06F) are defined as the bit table.

When R011 is ON, the bit position designated by lower 5 bits of D0011 in the bit table is set to ON,

and all other bits in the table are reset to OFF.

The following figure shows an operation example.

D C

D0011

1 1 0 0 0

Ignored

Sets ON

H18 (=24)

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

RW06

RW05

^{Basic Hardware and Function}219

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 122

Bit count

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A BC B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction counts the number of ON (1) bits of A, and stores the result in B.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

B Count data

Example

When R020 is ON, the number of ON (1) bits of the register RW032 is counted, and the result is

stored in D0102.

The following figure shows an operation example.

D C

RW032 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0

Counts the number of ON (1) bits = 7

D C

D0102 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

The result data (7) is stored in binary

220 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 128

CALL

Subroutine call

Expression

Input -[ CALL N. n ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction calls the subroutine number n.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

n Subroutine

number

Ö (Note)

Example

When X007 is ON, the subroutine number 8 is called. When the program execution is returned

from the subroutine, the output is turned ON.

Main program

Subroutine

| | [ CALL N.008 ]

[ SUBR (008)]

[ RET ]

Note

· The possible subroutine number is 0 to 15 (T1) or 0 to 255 (T1S).

· Refer to the SUBR instruction (FUN 137).

· In case of T1, nesting of subroutines is not allowed. That is, the CALL instruction cannot be used in

a subroutine.

· In case of T1S, nesting of subroutines is possible. (up to 3 levels)

· The CALL instruction can be used in an interrupt program. However, it is not allowed that the same

subroutine is called from an interrupt program and from main program.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}221

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 129

RET

Subroutine return

Expression

÷--[ RET ]-ê

Function

This instruction indicates the end of a subroutine. When program execution is reached this instruction,

it is returned to the original CALL instruction.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

Execution

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

Main program

Subroutine

| | [ CALL N.008 ]

[ SUBR (008)]

[ RET ]

Note

· Refer to the SUBR instruction (FUN 137).

· The RET instruction can be programmed only in the program type ‘Subroutine’.

· The RET instruction must be connected directly to the left power rail.

222 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 132

FOR

FOR (FOR-NEXT loop)

Expression

Input -[ FOR n ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the program segment between FOR and NEXT is executed n times repeatedly

in a scan.

When the input is OFF, the repetition is not performed. (the segment is executed once)

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No repetition

Repetition

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

1 - 32767

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

n Repetition

times

Example

This segment is executed 30 times repeatedly in a scan.

When R005 is ON, the program segment between FOR and NEXT is executed 30 times in a scan.

R005

| | [ FOR 30 ]

Executed 30 times in a scan when

R005 is ON.

[ NEXT ]

^{Basic Hardware and Function}223

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 133

NEXT (FOR-NEXT loop)

Expression

Input -[ NEXT ]- Output

Function

This instruction configures a FOR-NEXT loop.

If the input is OFF, The repetition is forcibly broken. and the program execution is moved to the next

instruction.

Execution condition

Input

OFF Forcibly breaks the repetition

ON Repetition

Operation

Output

OFF

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

When R005 is ON, the program segment between FOR and NEXT is executed 30 times in a scan.

In the above example, the rung 3 is executed 30 times. As a result, the data of D0000 to D0029

are transferred to D0500 to D0529. (Block transfer)

Note

· The FOR instruction must be used with a corresponding NEXT instruction one by one.

· Nesting of the FOR-NEXT loop is not allowed. That is, the FOR instruction cannot be used in a

FOR-NEXT loop.

· The FOR and NEXT instructions cannot be programmed on the same rung.

· The following connection is not allowed.

| | [ FOR n ]

| |

| | [ NEXT ]

| |

224 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 137

SUBR

Subroutine entry

Expression

÷-[ SUBR (n) ]--ê

Function

This instruction indicates the begging of a subroutine.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

n Subroutine

number

Ö (Note)

Example

The begging of the subroutine number 8 is indicated.

Main program

Subroutine

| | [ CALL N.008 ]

[ SUBR (008)]

[ RET ]

Note

· The possible subroutine number is 0 to 15 (T1) or 0 to 255 (T1S).

· Refer to the CALL instruction (FUN 128) and the RET instruction (FUN 129).

· The SUBR instruction can be programmed only in the program type ‘Subroutine’.

· Nesting of subroutine is not allowed. That is, the CALL instruction cannot be used in a subroutine.

· No other instruction cannot be placed on the rung of the SUBR instruction.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}225

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 140

Enable interrupt

Expression

Input -[ EI ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction enables the execution of user designated interrupt operation, i.e.

timer interrupt program and I/O interrupt programs.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

In the above example, the DI instruction disables the interrupt. Then the EI instruction enables the

interrupt again. As a result, the rung 2 instructions can be executed without interruption between

each instructions.

Note

· Refer to the DI instruction (FUN 141).

· If an interrupt factor is occurred during the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt is kept waiting and

it will be executed just after the EI instruction is executed.

· The EI instruction can be used only in the main program.

226 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 141

Disable interrupt

Expression

Input -[ DI ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction disables the execution of user designated interrupt operation,

i.e. timer interrupt program and I/O interrupt programs.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

In the above example, the interrupt is disabled when R000 is ON, and it is enabled when R000 is

OFF.

Note

· Refer to the EI instruction (FUN 140).

· If an interrupt factor is occurred during the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt is kept waiting and

it will be executed just after the EI instruction is executed.

· The DI instruction can be used only in the main program.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}227

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 142

IRET

Interrupt return

Expression

÷--[ IRET ]-ê

Function

This instruction indicates the end of an interrupt program. When program execution reaches this

instruction, it returns to the original location of the main program (or subroutine).

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

Execution

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

An interrupt program

(Timer interrupt,

I/O interrupt #1, #2, #3 or #4)

Note

· The IRET instruction can be used only in an interrupt program.

· There is no specific instruction which indicates the beginning of the interrupt program.

228 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 143

WDT

Watchdog timer reset

Expression

Input -[ WDT n ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction extend the scan time over detection time by 200 ms.

Normally, T1/T1S detects the scan time-over if a scan is not finished within 200 ms. This instruction

can be used to extend the detection time.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

1 - 100

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

n Extend time

Example

When R020 is ON, the scan time detection time is extended by 200 ms. The operand n has no

effect on the extended time. It is fixed as 200 ms.

Normal detection point

Extended point

100

150

200

250 300 (ms)

Extended by 200 ms

Scan

WDT instruction

execution

Note

· As for the upper T-series PLCs, the operand n specifies the extended time. However in the T1/T1S,

it is fixed as 200 ms regardless of the operand n.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}229

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 144

STIZ

Step sequence initialize

Expression

Input -[ STIZ (n) A ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, n devices starting with A are reset to OFF, and A is set to ON.

This instruction is used to initialize a series of step sequence. The step sequence is useful to describe

a sequential operation.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution at the rising edge of the input

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

1 - 64

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

n Size of step

sequence

A Start device

Example

When R020 is changed from OFF to ON, R400 is set to ON and subsequent 9 devices (R401 to

R409) are reset to OFF.

This instruction initializes a series of step sequence, 10 devices starting with R400.

R409

R408

R407

R406

R405

R404

R403

R402

R401

R400

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

10 devices starting with R400

Note

· The STIZ instruction is used together with STIN (FUN 145) and STOT (FUN 146) instructions to

configure the step sequence.

· The STIZ instruction is executed only when the input is changed from OFF to ON.

230 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 145

STIN

Step sequence input

Expression

Input -[ STIN A ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON and the device A is ON, the output is set to ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

When A is ON

When A is OFF

OFF

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Step device

Example

The following sequential operation is performed.

When R020 is changed from OFF to ON, R400 is set to ON and subsequent 9 devices (R401 to

R409) are reset to OFF.

When X004 comes ON, R400 is reset to OFF and R401 is set to ON.

When both X005 and R022 are ON, R401 is reset to OFF and R402 is set to ON.

R020

X004

X005

R022

R400

R401

R402

^{Basic Hardware and Function}231

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 146

STOT

Step sequence output

Expression

Input -[ STOT A ]-ê

Function

When the input is ON, the device A is set to ON and the devices of STIN instructions on the same rung

are reset to OFF.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Step device

Example

See example on STIN (FUN 145) instruction.

Note

· The STIZ, STIN and STOT instructions are used together to configure the step sequence.

· Two or more STOT instructions can be placed on one rung to perform simultaneous sequences.

· Two or more STIN instructions can be placed on one rung in parallel or in series to perform loop or

convergence of sequences. (Max. 11 STIN instructions on one rung)

· To perform the conditional branch (sequence selection), separate the rungs as follows.

This limitation is applied to T1 version 1.00 only.

[ STIN A ]

| |

[ STOT B ]

[ STOT C ]

[ STIN A ]

| |

[ STOT B ]

[ STOT C ]

Not allowed

Available

232 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 147

F/F

Flip-flop

Expression

Set input

- ^SF/F ^Q- Output

Reset input - ^R

Function

When the set input is ON, the device A is set to ON. When the reset input is ON, the device A is reset

to OFF. When both the set and reset inputs are OFF, the device A remains the state. If both the set

and reset inputs are ON, the device A is reset to OFF.

The state of the output is the same as the device A.

Execution condition

Set

input

OFF

Reset

input

Operation

Output

OFF No execution (A remains previous state)

ON Resets A to OFF

OFF Sets A to ON

Same

as A

Resets A to OFF

Operand

Name

Device

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

Constant Index

A Device

Example

When X003 is ON, R10E is set to ON. When X004 is ON, R10E is reset to OFF. If both are ON,

R10E is reset to OFF.

An example timing diagram is shown below.

X003

X004

R10E

Note

· For the set input, direct linking to a connecting point is not allowed. In this case, insert a dummy

contact (always ON = S04F, etc.) just before the input. Refer to Note of Shift register FUN 074.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}233

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 149

U/D

Up-down counter

Expression

Direction input - ^UU/D ^Q- Output

Count input

Enable input

- ^C

- ^E

Function

While the enable input is ON, this instruction counts the number of the count input changes from OFF

to ON. The count direction (up count or down count) is selected by the state of the direction input. The

count value is stored in the counter register A. The count value range is 0 to 65535.

· Up count when the direction input is ON

· Down count when the direction input is OFF

When the enable input is OFF, the counter register A is cleared to 0.

Execution condition

Enable

input

Operation

Output

OFF No operation (A is cleared to 0)

OFF

Count value is not limit value (0 or 65535)

Count value is limit value and count input is ON

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Count value

Example

Note

X005

X006

R010

C005

C.005

· The transitional contact is required for the

count input. Otherwise, counting is

executed every scan during X005 is ON

in this example.

· For the direction input and the count

input, direct linking to a connecting point

is not allowed. Refer to Note of Shift

234 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 154

CLND

Set calendar

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A CLND ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the built-in clock/calendar is set to the date and time specified by 6 registers

starting with A. If an invalid data is contained in the registers, the operation is not executed and the

output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No operation

Execution (data is valid))

No execution (data is not valid)

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Start of table

Example

When R020 is ON, the clock/calendar is set according to the data of D0050 to D0055, and the

output is OFF (R0031 is OFF).

If D0050 to D0055 contains invalid data, the setting operation is not executed and the output is

turned ON (R0031 comes ON).

Allowable data range (2-digit BCD)

8 7

D0050

D0051

D0052

D0053

D0054

D0055

H00

Year

Month

Day

Hour

Minute

Second

H00 to H99 (1990 - 2089)

H01 to H12

H01 to H31

H00 to H23

H00 to H59

Calendar

LSI

H00 to H59

Note

· The day of the week is automatically.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}235

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 155

CLDS

Calendar operation

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A CLDS B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction subtracts the date and time stored in 6 registers starting with A

from the current date and time, and stores the result in 6 registers starting with B.

If an invalid data is contained in the registers, the operation is not executed and the output is turned

ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No operation

Execution (data is valid))

No execution (data is not valid)

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Subtrahend

B Result

Example

When R020 is ON, the date and time data recorded in D0050 to D0055 are subtracted from the

current date and time of clock/calendar, and the result is stored in D0100 to D0105.

In normal operation, the output is OFF (R0035 is OFF). If D0050 to D0055 contains invalid data,

the operation is not executed and the output is turned ON (R0035 comes ON).

Current date & time

H0098

H0001

H0015

H0017

H0000

D0050

D0051

D0052

D0053

D0054

D0055

H0097

H0010

H0015

H0030

H0000

D0100

D0101

D0102

D0103

D0104

D0105

H0000

H0003

H0007

H0001

H0030

H0000

(Year)

(Month)

(Day)

(Hour)

(Minute)

(Second)

minus

Note

· Future date and time cannot be used as subtrahend A.

· In the calculation result, it means that 1 year is 365 days and 1 month is 30 days.

236 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 156

PID3

Pre-derivative real PID

Expression

Input -[ A PID3 B ® C ]- Output

Function

Performs PID (Proportional, Integral, Derivative) control which is a fundamental method of feed-back

control. (Pre-derivative real PID algorithm) This PID3 instruction has the following features.

· For derivative action, incomplete derivative is used to suppress interference of high-frequency

noise and to expand the stable application range,

· Controllability and stability are enhanced in case of limit operation for MV, by using digital PID

algorithm succeeding to benefits of analog PID.

· Auto, cascade and manual modes are supported in this instruction.

· Digital filter is available for PV.

· Direct / reverse operation is selectable.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF Initialization

Execute PID every setting interval

ON when

execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Top of input data

B Top of parameter

C Top of output data

Input data

Control parameter

Proportional gain

Integral time

Derivative time

Dead-band

A-mode initial SV

Input filter constant

ASV differential limit

MMV differential limit DMMV

Initial status

MV upper limit

MV lower limit

Output data

Manipulation value

Last error

Last derivative value

Last PV

A+1

A+2

A+3

A+4

A+5

B+1

B+2

B+3

B+4

B+5

B+6

B+7

B+8

Process input value

A-mode set value

C-mode set value

M-mode MV input

MV tracking input

Mode setting

PVC

ASV

CSV

MMV

TMV

K_P

T_I

T_D

ISV

e_n-1

D_n-1

PV_n-1

SV_n-1

C+1

C+2

C+3

C+4

C+5

C+6

C+7

C+8

C+9

Last SV

MODE

Integral remainder

Derivative remainder

Internal MV

Internal counter

Control interval

DSV

MV_n

A-mode: Auto mode

C-mode: Cascade mode

M-mode: Manual mode

STS

DMV

B+9

B+10

B+11

B+12

MV differential limit

Control interval setting

^{Basic Hardware and Function}237

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

Control block diagram

Integral

control

Integral

T_I×s

Auto

mode

DI_n

ASV

MV_n

DSV

Proportional

Differential

MVC_n

SV_n

e_n

DP_n

DMV_n

Gap

K_P

MVS

H/L

DMV

CSV

Derivative

Cascade

mode

MMV

T_D×s

DD_n

DMMV

1+h×T_D×s

Manual

mode

Differential limit

PV_n

(h = 0.1)

MVS: Velocity ® Position

MV_n= MV_n-1± DMV_n

H/L: Upper / lower limit

DMV: Differential limit

PVC

1+T×s

Digtal filter

Integral action control:

When MV is limited (H/L, DMV) and the integral value has same sign as limit over, integral action

stopped.

Velocity ® Position conversion:

In Direct mode, MV increases when PV is increased.

® MV_n= MV_n-1- DMv_n

In Reverse mode, MV decreases when PV is increased.

® MV_n= MV_n-1+ DMV_n

Gap (dead-band) operation:

Error e

SV - PV

GP (%) GP (%)

Algorithm

Digital filter:

ⁿ=

n - 1

PV (1 FT) PVC FT PV

Here,

0.000 £ FT £ 0.999

238 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

PID algorithm:

DMVⁿ= K^P×(DPⁿ+ DIⁿ+ DDⁿ

)

MVⁿ= MVⁿ^-¹± DMVⁿ

Here,

DPⁿ= eⁿ- eⁿ^-¹

= SVⁿ- PVⁿ

(If GP

¹ 0, Gap is applied)

× Dt + Ir

(If T_I= 0, then DI_n= 0)

DIⁿ

^D×

(PVⁿ

- 1

PVⁿ

)

Dt Dⁿ

- 1

DDⁿ

D + h×

= Dⁿ^-¹+ DDⁿ

h = 0.1 (Fixed)

Parameter details

Process input value PVC (0.00 to 100.00 %)

Data range: 0 to 10000

A+1 Auto mode set value ASV (0.00 to 100.00 %)

A+2 Cascade mode set value CSV (0.00 to 100.00 %)

A+3 Manual mode MV MMV (-25.00 to 125.00 %)

A+4 MV tracking input TMV (-25.00 to 125.00 %)

A+5 Mode setting MODE

Data range: 0 to 10000

Data range: -2500 to 12500

Operation mode

00 : Manual mode

01 : Auto mode

10 : Cascade mode

11 : (Reserve)

Tracking designation

0 : No

1 : Yes

Proportional gain K_P(0.00 to 327.67)

Data range: 0 to 32767

B+1 Integral time T_I(0.000 to 32.767 min., DI_n=0 if T_I=0) Data range: 0 to 32767

B+2 Derivative time T_D(0.000 to 32.767 min.)

B+3 Gap (dead-band) GP (0.00 to 10.00 %)

B+4 Auto mode initial set value ISV (0.00 to 100.00 %)

B+5 Input filter constant FT (0.000 to 0.999)

B+6 ASV differential limit DSV (0.00 to 100.00 %/Dt)

B+7 MMV differential limit DMMV (0.00 to 100.00 %/Dt)

Data range: 0 to 32767

Data range: 0 to 1000

Data range: 0 to 10000

Data range: 0 to 999

Data range: 0 to 10000

^{Basic Hardware and Function}239

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

B+8 Initial status STS

Initial operation mode

00 : Manual mode

01 : Auto mode

10 : Cascade mode

11 : (Reserve)

Direct / reverse selection

0 : Direct

1 : Reverse

B+9 MV upper limit MH (-25.00 to 125.00 %)

B+10 MV lower limit ML (-25.00 to 125.00 %)

B+11 MV differential limit DMV (0.00 to 100.00 %/Dt)

B+12 Control interval setting n (1 to 32767 times)

Data range: -2500 to 12500

Data range: 0 to 10000

Data range: 1 to 32767

Executes PID every n scan. Therefore, control interval Dt = n ´ constant scan interval

(It is treated as n = 1 when n £ 0)

C+1

Manipulation value MV (-25.00 to 125.00 %)

Internal work area

Data range: -2500 to 12500

C+9

Operation

1. When the instruction input is OFF:

Initializes the PID3 instruction.

Operation mode is set as specified by B+8.

Auto mode SV is set as specified by B+4.

Manual mode MV is set as current MV.

Internal calculation data is initialized.

MV remains unchanged.

A+5 bit 0, 1 ¬ B+8 bit 0, 1

ASV ¬ ISV

MMV ¬ MV

2. When the instruction input is ON:

Executes PID calculation every n scan which is specified by B+12. The following operation modes are

available according to the setting of A+5.

· Auto mode

This is a normal PID control mode with ASV as set value.

Set value differential limit DSV, manipulation value upper/lower limit MH/ML and differential limit DMV are

effective.

Bump-less changing from auto mode to manual mode is available. (Manual mode manipulation value MMV

is over-written by current MV automatically. MMV ¬ MV)

240 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

· Manual mode

In this mode, the manipulation value MV can be directly controlled by the input value of MMV.

MV differential limit for manual mode DMMV is effective. MH/ML and DMV are not effective.

When mode is changed from manual to auto or cascade, the operation is started from the current MV.

· Cascade mode

This is a mode for PID cascade connection. PID is executed with CSV as set value.

Different from the auto mode, set value differential limit is not effective. Manipulation value upper/lower limit

MH/ML and differential limit DMV are effective.

Bump-less changing from cascade mode to manual mode is available. (Manual mode manipulation value

MMV is over-written by current MV automatically. MMV ¬ MV)

And, bump-less changing from cascade mode to auto mode is available. (Auto mode set value ASV is

over-written by current CSV automatically. ASV ¬ CSV)

· MV tracking

This function is available in auto and cascade modes. When the tracking designation (A+5 bit 2) is ON,

tracking input TMV is directly output as MV.

Manipulation value upper/lower limit MH/ML is effective, but differential limit DMV is not effective.

When the tracking designation is changed to OFF, the operation is started from the current MV.

Note

· PID3 instruction is only usable on the main-program.

· PID3 instruction must be used under the constant scan mode. The constant scan interval can be selected in

the range of 10 to 200 ms, 10 ms increments.

· The data handled by the PID3 instruction are % units. Therefore, process input value PVC, manipulation value

MV, etc., should be converted to % units (scaling), before and/or after the PID3 instruction. For this purpose,

the function generator instruction (FUN165 FG) is convenient.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}241

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 160

Upper limit

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A UL B ® C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the following operation is executed. (Upper limit for A by B)

If A £ B, then C = A.

If A > B, then C = B.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No operation

Execution: not limited (A £ B)

Execution: limited (A > B)

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Operation data

B Upper limit

C Destination

Example

When R030 is ON, the upper limit operation is executed for the data of RW018 by the data of

D1200, and the result is stored in RW021.

(RW021)

Upper limit B (D1200)

A (RW018)

When RW018 is 3000 and D1200 is 4000, 3000 is stored in RW021 and R0040 is OFF.

When RW018 is 4500 and D1200 is 4000, the limit value 4000 is stored in RW021 and R0040 is

ON.

Note

· This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

242 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 161

Lower limit

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A LL B ® C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, the following operation is executed. (Lower limit for A by B)

If A ³ B, then C = A.

If A < B, then C = B.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No operation

Execution: not limited (A ³ B)

Execution: limited (A < B)

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Operation data

B Lower limit

C Destination

Example

When R031 is ON, the lower limit operation is executed for the data of RW019 by the data of

D1220, and the result is stored in RW022.

(RW022)

A (RW019)

Lower limit B (D1220)

When RW019 is -1000 and D1220 is -1800, -1000 is stored in RW022 and R0041 is OFF.

When RW019 is 800 and D1220 is 1200, the limit value 1200 is stored in RW022 and R0041 is

ON.

Note

· This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

^{Basic Hardware and Function}243

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 162

MAX

Maximum value

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A MAX (n) B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction searches for the maximum value from the table of size n words

starting with A, and stores the maximum value in B and the pointer indicating the position of the

maximum value in B+1. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 64.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

1 - 64

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Start of table

n Table size

B Result

Example

When R010 is ON, the maximum value is found from the register table D0200 to D0209 (10

words), and the maximum value is stored in D0500 and the pointer is stored in D0501.

Pointer

D0200

D0201

D0202

D0203

D0204

D0205

D0206

D0207

D0208

D0209

100

10000

-1000

200

-300

20000

-30

D0500

D0501

20000

(Maximum value)

(Pointer)

Note

· This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

· If there are two or more maximum value in the table, the lowest pointer is stored.

· If Index register K is used as operand B, the pointer data is discarded.

244 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 163

MIN

Minimum value

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A MIN (n) B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction searches for the minimum value from the table of size n words

starting with A, and stores the minimum value in B and the pointer indicating the position of the

minimum value in B+1. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 64.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

1 - 64

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Start of table

n Table size

B Result

Example

When R011 is ON, the minimum value is found from the register table D0200 to D0209 (10

words), and the minimum value is stored in D0510 and the pointer is stored in D0511.

Pointer

D0200

D0201

D0202

D0203

D0204

D0205

D0206

D0207

D0208

D0209

100

10000

-1000

D0510

D0511

-1000

(Minimum value)

(Pointer)

200

-300

20000

-30

Note

· This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

· If there are two or more minimum value in the table, the lowest pointer is stored.

· If Index register K is used as operand B, the pointer data is discarded.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}245

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 164

AVE

Average value

T1S only

Expression

Input -[ A AVE (n) B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction calculates the average value of the data stored in the n registers

starting with A, and stores the average value in B. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 64.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

1 - 64

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Start of table

n Table size

B Result

Example

When R012 is ON, the average value of the data stored in the register table D0200 to D0209 (10

words), and the average value is stored in D0520.

D0200

D0201

D0202

D0203

D0204

D0205

D0206

D0207

D0208

D0209

100

10000

-1000

D0520

2900

(Average value)

200

-300

20000

-30

246 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 165

Function generator

Expression

Input -[ A FG (n) B ® C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds the function value f(x) for A as x, and stores it in C. The

function f(x) is defined by the parameters stored in 2 ´ n registers starting with B.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

Input value

n Parameter size

B Start of

parameters

C Function value

f(x)

1 - 32

Example

When R010 is ON, the FG instruction finds the function value f(x) for x = XW004, and stores the

result in D0100.

The function f(x) is defined by 2 ´ 4 = 8 parameters stored in D0600 to D0607. In this example,

these parameters are set at the first scan.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}247

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

Parameter table

4 registers for x parameters and subsequent 4 registers for corresponding f(x) parameters

(x₄,y₄)

y = f(x)

1800

D0600

D0601

D0602

D0603

D0604

D0605

D0606

D0607

-2000 x₁

-100 x₂

100 x₃

2000 x₄

-1800 y₁

-300 y₂

300 y₃

300

(x₃,y₃)

100

-2000

-100

2000

(x₂,y₂)

-300

1800 y₄

-1800

(x₁,y₁)

The FG instruction interpolators f(x) value for x based on the n parameters of (x_i,y_i).

For example, if XW04 is 1500 (x = 1500), the result 1405 (f(x) = 1405) is stored in D0100.

1800

1405

300

-2000

-100

100

-300

2000

1500

-1800

Note

· The order of the x parameters should be x₁£ x₂£ ... £ x_i£ ... £ x_n. In the above example, the data

of D0600 to D0603 should be D0600 £ D0601 £ D0602 £ D0603.

· If x is smaller than x₁, y₁is given as f(x). In this example, D0604 data (-1800) is stored in D0100

if XW04 is smaller than D0600 (-2000).

· If x is greater than x_n, y_nis given as f(x). In this example, D0607 data (1800) is stored in D0100

if XW04 is greater than D0603 (2000).

· The valid data range is -32768 to 32767.

248 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 180

ABS

Absolute value

Expression

Input -[ A ABS B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds the absolute value of operand A, and stores it in B.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

B Destination

Example

When X006 is ON, the absolute value of RW38 is stored in D0121.

For example, if RW38 is -12000, the absolute value 12000 is stored in D0121.

D0121

32767

12000

-32767

-12000

32767

RW38

Note

· The data range of A is -32768 to 32767. If the data of A is -32768, 32767 is stored in B.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}249

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 182

NEG

2’s complement

Expression

Input -[ A NEG B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds the 2’s complement value of A, and stores it in B.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

B Destination

Example

When X007 is ON, the 2’s complement value (sign inverted data) of RW39 is stored in D0122.

For example, if RW38 is 4660, the 2’s complement value -4660 is stored in D0122.

2’s complement data is calculated as follows.

RW39 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

(4660)

(-4661)

(-4660)

Bit inverse

1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1

+ 1

D0122 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

Note

· The data range of A is -32768 to 32767. If the data of A is -32768, the same data -32768 is stored

in B.

250 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 183

DNEG Double-word 2’s complement

Expression

Input -[ A+1×A DNEG B+1×B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds the 2’s complement value of double-word data A+1×A, and

stores it in B+1×B.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

B Destination

Example

When X007 is ON, the 2’s complement value (sign inverted data) of double-word register

RW41×RW40 is stored in double-word register D0151×D0150.

For example, if RW41×RW40 is -1234567890, the 2’s complement value 1234567890 is stored in

D0151×D0150.

Note

· The data range of A+1×A is -2147483648 to 2147483647. If the data of A+1×A is -2147483648, the

same data -2147483648 is stored in B+1×B.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}251

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 185

7SEG

7 segment decode

Expression

Input -[ A 7SEG B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction converts the lower 4 bits data of A into the 7 segment code, and

stores it in B. The 7 segment code is normally used for a numeric display LED.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

B Destination

Example

When X000 is ON, the lower 4 bits data of RW15 is converted into the 7 segment code, and the

result is stored in lower 8 bits of RW10. 0 is stored in upper 8 bits of RW10.

For example, if RW15 is H0009, the corresponding 7 segment code H006F is stored in RW10.

RW15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 (H0009)

Upper 12 bits are ignored

7 segment decode

RW10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 (H006F)

0 is stored in upper 8 bits

The 7 segment code conversion table is shown on the next page.

252 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

Operand A (lower 4 bits)

Hex

7 segment LED

composition

Operand B (lower 8 bits)

B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

Display

Binary

0000

0001

0010

0011

0100

0101

0110

0111

1000

1001

1010

1011

1100

1101

1110

1111

^{Basic Hardware and Function}253

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 186

ASC

ASCII conversion

Expression

Input -[ A ASC B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction converts the alphanumeric characters into the ASCII codes, and

stores them in the register table starting with B. (16 characters maximum)

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Characters

B Start of

destination

Example

When R030 is ON, the characters ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMN’ is converted into the ASCII codes, and

the result is stored in 8 registers starting with lower 8 bits (byte) of D0200 (D0200 to D0207).

High

Low

D0200 H42 (B)

D0201 H44 (D)

D0202 H46 (F)

D0203 H48 (H)

D0204 H4A (J)

D0205 H4C (L)

D0206 H4E (N)

D0207

H41 (A)

H43 (C)

H45 (E)

H47 (G)

H49 (I)

H4B (K)

H4D (M)

Previous data is remained

Note

· Only the number of bytes converted are stored. The rest are not changed. In the above example, 14

characters are converted into 14 bytes of ASCII code, and these ASCII codes are stored in 7

registers (D0200 to D0206). The data of D0207 remains unchanged.

254 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 188

BIN

Binary conversion

Expression

Input -[ A BIN B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction converts the 4 digits of BCD data of A into binary, and stores in

B. If any digit of A contains non-BCD code (other than H0 through H9), the conversion is not executed

and the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

ERF

OFF No execution

Normal execution

BCD data error

OFF

Set

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source (BCD)

H0000 -

H9999

B Destination

(Binary)

Example

When R017 is ON, the BCD data of RW28 is converted into binary data, and the result is stored in

D0127.

For example, if RW28 is H1234, the binary data 1234 is stored in D0127.

RW28

H1234

BCD to Binary

D0127

1234

Note

· If any digit of operand A contains non-BCD data, e.g. H13A6, the conversion is not executed and

the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}255

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 190

BCD

BCD conversion

Expression

Input -[ A BCD B ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction converts the binary data of A into BCD, and stores in B. If the

data of A is not in the range of 0 to 9999, the conversion is not executed and the instruction error flag

(ERF = S051) is set to ON.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

ERF

OFF No execution

Normal execution

Binary data error

OFF

Set

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

0 - 9999

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

(Binary)

B Destination

(BCD)

Example

When R019 is ON, the data of D0211 is converted into 4-digit BCD, and the result is stored in

RW22.

For example, if D0211 is 5432, the BCD data H5432 is stored in RW22.

D0211

5432

Binary to BCD

RW22

H5432

Note

· If the data of A is smaller than 0 or greater than 9999, the conversion is not executed and the

instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

256 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 235

I/O

Direct I/O

Expression

Input -[ I/O (n) A ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction immediately updates the external input (XW) and output (YW)

registers which are in the range of n registers starting with A.

· For XW register ... reads the data from corresponding input circuit

· For YW register ... writes the data into corresponding output circuit

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

OFF No execution

Execution

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

1 - 32

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

n Register size

A Start of

registers

Example

When R010 is ON, the 4 registers starting with XW00 (XW00 to YW03) are updated immediately.

XW00

XW01

YW02

YW03

Input

circuit

Output

circuit

^{Basic Hardware and Function}257

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

Note

· In the T1/T1S, the following register/device range is only effective for this Direct I/O instruction.

Input on basic unit

Output on basic unit

Option card

T2 I/O modules

T1-16

T1-28

T1-40

T1-40S

X000 - X007

X000 - X00D

X000 - X007

Y020 - Y027

Y020 - Y02D

Y020 - Y027

Not effective

Effective

· The Direct I/O instruction can be programmed in the main program and in the interrupt program.

If this instruction is programmed in both, the instruction in the main program should be executed in

interrupt disable state. Refer to EI (FUN 140) and DI (FUN 141) instructions.

258 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 236

XFER

Expanded data transfer

Expression

Input -[ A XFER B ® C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, data block transfer is performed between the source which is indirectly

designated by A and A+1 and the destination which is indirectly designated by C and C+1. The

transfer size (number of words) is designated by B.

The transfer size is 1 to 256 words. (except for writing into EEPROM)

Data transfer between the following objects are available.

· CPU register (RW or D) « EEPROM (D register)

· CPU register (RW or D) « T1S RS-485 port (T1S only)

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

ERF

OFF No execution

Normal execution

When error is occurred (see Note)

Set

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

parameter

B Transfer size

C Destination

parameter

Parameters

Source parameter

Type

Transfer size and status

Transfer size

Destination parameter

Type

A+1

Leading address

B+1 Status flag for RS-485 port

B+2

(max. 2 words)

C+1

Leading address

RW register (RAM)

Type code

H0003

Leading address

Transfer size

1 to 64 (T1)

1 to 256 (T1S)

1 to 256

0 to 63 (T1)

0 to 255 (T1S)

0 to 1023 (T1)

0 to 4095 (T1S)

0 to 511 (T1)

D register (RAM)

H0004

H0020

D register (EEPROM)

1 to 16 (if destination, T1)

1 to 32 (if destination,T1S)

1 to 256 (if source)

1 to 256

0 to 2047 (T1S)

T1S RS-485 port

H0030

0 (fixed)

^{Basic Hardware and Function}259

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

CPU register « built-in EEPROM

In the EEPROM, the D registers are divided into pages as follows.

T1S

D0000

Page 1

(16 words)

D0000

Page 1

(32 words)

· Writing data into the EEPROM is

available within one page at a

time. (max. 16 words for T1 and

max. 32 words for T1S)

D0015

D0016

D0031

D0032

Page 2

(16 words)

(32 words)

D0031

D0063

· For data reading from the

EEPROM, there is no need to

consider the pages.

D0496

D0511

Page 32

(16 words)

D2016

D2047

Page 64

(32 words)

Example

When R020 is changed from OFF to ON, 10 words of RAM data (D0700 to D0709) are written into

the EEPROM (D0016 to D0025).

D1000 (H0004) and D1001 (700) indicate the leading register of the source table (D0700 in RAM).

D1002 (10) indicates the transfer size (10 words = 10 registers). D1003 (H0020 = 32) and D1004

(16) indicate the leading register of the destination table (D0016 in EEPROM).

Note

· The XFER instruction is not executed as error in the following cases. In these cases, the instruction

error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. If the ERF is set to ON once, it remains ON until resetting to

OFF by user program.

(1) When the number of words transferred exceeds limit.

(2) When the source/destination table of transfer is out of the valid range.

(3) When the transfer combination is invalid.

· The EEPROM has a life limit for data writing into an address. It is 100,000 times. Pay attention not

to exceed the limit. (EEPROM alarm flag = S007 is not updated by this instruction)

· Once data writing into the EEPROM is executed, EEPROM access (read/write) is prohibited for the

duration of 10 ms. Therefore, minimum 10 ms interval is necessary for data writing.

· The XFER instruction can be programmed in the main program and in the interrupt program.

If this instruction is programmed in both, the instruction in the main program should be executed in

interrupt disable state. Refer to EI (FUN 140) and DI (FUN 141) instructions.

260 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

CPU register « T1S RS-485 port (T1S only)

When the instruction input is ON, one set of message (from start character to the trailing code)

which is received by the RS-485 port is read from the receive buffer, and stored in the CPU

registers. The transfer size is fixed to 256 words. The execution status and the message length (in

bytes) are stored in the status flag.

The instruction input must be kept ON until the receiving operation is complete.

Example

Source designation

H0030

Transfer size

00256 (fixed)

D0003 Execution status

D0004 Message length

Destination designation

D0000

D0001

D0002

D0005

D0006

H0004

00100

00000

T1S RS-485 port

D0100 (CPU register)

When R0000 is ON, one set of received message is read and stored in D0100 and after.

Execution status:H0000 ... Normal complete

H0001 ... Communication error (parity error, framing error)

H0002 ... Message length over (more than 512 bytes)

H0003 ... Receive buffer over flow

H0004 ... Receive time-out (from start character to the trailing code)

Baudrate

Time-out setting

300, 600, 1200 bps 30 seconds

2400 bps

4800 bps

9600 bps

19200 bps

15 seconds

7 seconds

3 seconds

1.5 seconds

Message length: 0 .............. No receive message

1 to 512 ... Message length in bytes

Note

· The XFER instruction is not executed as error in the following cases. In these cases, the instruction

error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. If the ERF is set to ON once, it remains ON until resetting to

OFF by user program.

(1) The leading address for the RS-485 port designation is other than 0.

(2) Transfer size is other than 256.

(3) Mode setting of the RS-485 port is not the free ASCII mode.

(4) This instruction is programmed in the sub-program #1.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}261

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

When the instruction input is ON, one set of message which is stored in the source table (from

start character to the trailing code) is transmitted through the RS-485 port. The execution status is

stored in the status flag.

The instruction input must be kept ON until the transmitting operation is complete.

Example

Source designation

H00 H04

Transfer size

00012

D0013 Execution status

Destination designation

H00 H30

00000

D0010

D0011

D0012

D0015

D0016

00500

D0500 (CPU register)

T1S RS-485 port

When R0001 is ON, one set of message (ended by the trailing code) stored in the range of D0500

to D0511 (12 words) is transmitted through the RS-485 port.

Execution status:H0000 ... Normal complete

H0001 ... During transmitting the message

H0002 ... Communication busy

H0003 ... During the reset operation

H0004 ... Send time-out (from start character to the trailing code)

H0005 ... Send message length error (no trailing code in the source table)

Baudrate

Time-out setting

300, 600, 1200 bps 30 seconds

2400 bps

4800 bps

9600 bps

19200 bps

15 seconds

7 seconds

3 seconds

1.5 seconds

Note

· The XFER instruction is not executed as error in the following cases. In these cases, the instruction

error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. If the ERF is set to ON once, it remains ON until resetting to

OFF by user program.

(1) The leading address for the RS-485 port designation is other than 0.

(2) Transfer size is out of the range of 1 to 256.

(3) Mode setting of the RS-485 port is not the free ASCII mode.

(4) This instruction is programmed in the sub-program #1.

262 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 237

READ

Special module data read

Expression

Input -[ A READ B ® C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction reads data from the buffer memory of the special module that is

designated by operand A, and stores them in registers starting with operand C.

The transfer source address (buffer memory address) is designated by operand B.

The transfer size (number of words) is designated by operand B+1.

This instruction is only effective for the T2 I/O modules connected to the T1-40 or T1-40S.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

ERF

OFF No execution

Normal execution

When error is occurred (see Note)

Set

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Special module

H0004 -

H0007

B Transfer

parameter

C Destination

Example

When R010 is ON, the buffer memory data of the size indicated by RW51, starting with the

address indicated by RW50 of the special module allocated to XW06, are read and stored in

D0100 and after.

XW06 special module

T1/T1S

RW50 H8000

RW51 16

Buffer memory

H8000 1234

READ

D0100 1234

D0115 5678

H800F 5678

16 words

^{Basic Hardware and Function}263

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

Note

· This instruction is only effective for the T2 I/O modules connected to the T1-40 or T1-40S by using

the expansion rack.

· The special module can be designated not only by the assigned register, but also by the mounting

position. The mounting position is designated by a constant data for the operand A as follows.

Slot number (hexadecimal)

Unit number (hexadecimal)

In the T1-40/T1-40S, 0 is only available for the unit number and 4 to 7 are available for the slot

number. The first slot (left most slot) of the expansion rack is recognized as slot 4. Consequently,

available designation is H0004 to H0007.

· The READ instruction is not executed as error in the following cases. In these cases, the instruction

error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. If the ERF is set to ON once, it remains ON until resetting to

OFF by user program.

(1) When the operand A is other than a valid constant (see above) or XW/YW register.

(2) When no answer error occurs with the designated special module.

(3) When the number of words transferred exceeds 256 words.

(4) When the source table of transfer is out of the valid range.

(5) When the destination table of transfer is out of the valid range.

· The READ instruction can be programmed in the main program and in the interrupt program.

If this instruction is programmed in both, the instruction in the main program should be executed in

interrupt disable state. Refer to EI (FUN 140) and DI (FUN 141) instructions.

264 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

FUN 238 WRITE Special module data write

Expression

Input -[ A WRITE B ® C ]- Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction transfers data stored in registers starting with operand A into the

buffer memory of the special module that is designated by operand C.

The destination address (buffer memory address) is designated by operand B.

The transfer size (number of words) is designated by operand B+1.

This instruction is only effective for the T2 I/O modules connected to the T1-40 or T1-40S.

Execution condition

Input

Operation

Output

OFF

ERF

OFF No execution

Normal execution

When error is occurred (see Note)

Set

Operand

Name

Device

Constant Index

T. C. XW YW RW SW T

A Source

B Transfer

parameter

C Special module

H0004 -

H0007

Example

When R011 is ON, the register data of the size indicated by RW56, starting with D0200, are

transferred to the buffer memory starting with the address indicated by RW55 of the special

module allocated to YW08.

T1/T1S

YW08 special module

RW55 H80B0

RW56 150

Buffer memory

D0200 1234

D0349 5678

WRITE

H80B0 1234

H8145 5678

150 words

^{Basic Hardware and Function}265

6F3B0250

7. Instructions

Note

· This instruction is only effective for the T2 I/O modules connected to the T1-40 or T1-40S by using

the expansion rack.

· The special module can be designated not only by the assigned register, but also by the mounting

position. The mounting position is designated by a constant data for the operand C as follows.

Slot number (hexadecimal)

Unit number (hexadecimal)

In the T1-40/T1-40S, 0 is only available for the unit number and 4 to 7 are available for the slot

number. The first slot (left most slot) of the expansion rack is recognized as slot 4. Consequently,

available designation is H0004 to H0007.

· The WRITE instruction is not executed as error in the following cases. In these cases, the

instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. If the ERF is set to ON once, it remains ON until

resetting to OFF by user program.

(1) When the operand C is other than a valid constant (see above) or XW/YW register.

(2) When no answer error occurs with the designated special module.

(3) When the number of words transferred exceeds 256 words.

(4) When the source table of transfer is out of the valid range.

(5) When the destination table of transfer is out of the valid range.

· The WRITE instruction can be programmed in the main program and in the interrupt program.

If this instruction is programmed in both, the instruction in the main program should be executed in

interrupt disable state. Refer to EI (FUN 140) and DI (FUN 141) instructions.

266 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

Section 8

Special I/O Functions

8.1 Special I/O function overview, 268

8.2 Variable input filter constant, 272

8.3 High speed counter, 273

8.4 Interrupt input function, 280

8.5 Analog setting function, 282

8.6 Pulse output function, 283

8.7 PWM output function, 285

^{Basic Hardware and Function}267

8. Special I/O Functions

8.1 Special I/O function overview

The T1/T1S supports the special I/O functions as listed below.

Function name

Variable input filter

constant

Function summary

Input filter constant (ON/OFF delay time) can be set by SW16 setting

user program. The setting range is 0 to 15 ms

(1 ms units). Default value is 10 ms. This function is

applied for X000 to X007 (8 points as a block).

Remarks

is necessary to

use this

function. (Note)

High

speed

counter

Single phase Counts the number of pulses of single phase pulse

up-counter train. 2 channels of pulse input are available. The

Only one

among these 4

countable pulse rate is up to 5 kHz for each channel. functions can

be selected.

SW16 is used

Channel 1 ¼ X000 count input, X002 reset input

Channel 2 ¼ X001 count input, X003 reset input

Single phase Counts the number of pulses in a specified sampling

to select the

speed-

counter

time. The sampling time setting is 10 to 1000 ms (10 function.

ms units). 2 channels of pulse input are available. The

countable pulse rate is up to 5 kHz for each channel.

Channel 1 ¼ X000 count input

(Note)

Channel 2 ¼ X001 count input

Quadrature Counts the 2-phase pulses whose phases are shifted

bi-pulse

counter

90° each other. Counts up when phase A precedes,

and counts down when phase B precedes. The

countable pulse rate is up to 5 kHz.

Phase A ¼ X000

Phase B ¼ X001

Reset ¼¼ X002

Interrupt input function Immediately activates the corresponding I/O interrupt

program when the interrupt input is changed from OFF

to ON (or ON to OFF). 2 points of interrupt input are

available.

X002 ¼ Interrupt 1 (I/O interrupt program #3)

X003 ¼ Interrupt 2 (I/O interrupt program #4)

Analog setting function The value of the analog setting adjuster is converted

into digital value (0 to 1000) and stored in the SW

V0 ¼ SW30

No function

selection is

required.

V1 ¼ SW31

Pulse output function Variable frequency pulse train can be output. The

available pulse rate is 50 to 5000 Hz (1 Hz units).

Y020 ¼ CW or Pulse (PLS)

Either one

between these

2 functions can

be used.

Y021 ¼ CCW or Direction (DIR)

PWM output function Variable duty cycle pulse train can be output. The

available ON duty setting is 0 to 100 % (1 % units).

Y020 ¼ PWM output

SW26 is used

to select the

function. (Note)

NOTE

The above special I/O functions, except the variable input filter constant and

analog setting functions, are available only in the DC input types.

268 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

8. Special I/O Functions

Mode setting for the special I/O functions

These functions, except the analog setting function, are selected by setting data into

SW16 and SW26 by user program. These registers work as mode setting registers for

the special I/O functions. The data setting for these registers, i.e. mode setting for the

special I/O functions, is effective only at the first scan.

Note) In the explanation below, HSC and INT mean the high speed counter and the

interrupt input functions respectively.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

SW16

0 0

Bit 0 < HSC and INT master flag >

0: No use

1: Use

Bit 1 < HSC / INT selection >

0: INT

1: HSC

Bits 2 and 3 < INT No.1 mode >

00: No use (Reserve)

01: Rising (OFF to ON)

10: Falling (ON to OFF)

11: No use (Reserve)

Bits 6 and 7 < INT No.2 mode >

00: No use (Reserve)

01: Rising (OFF to ON)

10: Falling (ON to OFF)

11: No use (Reserve)

Bits A and B < HSC mode >

00: Single phase up-counter

01: Single phase speed-counter

10: Quadrature bi-pulse counter

11: No use (Reserve)

Bits C and D < Enable flag for HSC / INT >

00: CH2 - disable, CH1 - disable

01: CH2 - disable, CH1 - enable

10: CH2 - enable, CH1 - disable

11: CH2 - enable, CH1 - enable

Bit F < Variable input filter constant >

0: No use (fixed to 10 ms)

1: Use

^{Basic Hardware and Function}269

8. Special I/O Functions

Note) In the explanation below, P-OUT means the pulse output function.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

SW26

Bit 0 < P-OUT and PWM master flag >

0: No use

1: Use

Bit 1 < P-OUT / PWM selection >

0: PWM

1: P-OUT

Bit 2 < PLS mode >

0: CW/CCW

1: Pulse/Direction (PLS/DIR)

P-OUT / PWM operation error flag

(These are not user setting items)

Bit D < PWM pulse width error >

0: Normal

1: Error

Bit E < PWM ON duty setting error >

0: Normal

1: Error

Bit F < Frequency setting error >

0: Normal

1: Error

270 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

8. Special I/O Functions

The table below summarizes the mode setting data of each function. In the table,

‘-’ means do not care.

SW16

Variable input filter constant

E D C B

Use

1 0

0 0

- - - -

- -

SW16

High speed counter

E D C B

Single phase

up-counter

Channel 1 only

Channel 2 only

Both channels

Channel 1 only

Channel 2 only

Both channels

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

Single phase

speed-counter

Quadrature bi-pulse counter

SW16

Interrupt input function

E D C B

Interrupt 1 only Rising (OFF to ON)

Falling (ON to OFF)

Interrupt 2 only Rising (OFF to ON)

Falling (ON to OFF)

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1

0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

Both interrupts No.1 = Rising, No.2 = Rising

1 and 2

No.1 = Rising, No.2 = Falling

No.1 = Falling, No.2 = Rising

No.1 = Falling, No.2 = Falling

SW26

Pulse output function

E D C B

CW/CCW method

Pulse/Direction (PLS/DIR) method

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

- - -

SW26

PWM output function

E D C B

Use

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

- - -

For example, the following programs can be used to select the quadrature bi-pulse

counter.

(H0803)

^{Basic Hardware and Function}271

8. Special I/O Functions

8.2 Variable input filter constant

Function

The input filter constant (ON/OFF delay time) of the leading 8 points X000 to X007 can

be specified by user program within the range of 0 to 15 ms. The default is 10 ms.

The setting value is recognized at the first scan. Therefore, it cannot be changed after

the second scan.

Related registers

SW16 Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

SW17 Input filter constant value

F E D C B A

No use (set to 0)

Setting value

0 to 15

Operation

Input signal

Internal logic

Scan cycle

X device

T: Input filter constant (0 to 15 ms)

Sample program

This program sets the input filter constant to 3 ms.

NOTE

For the AC input types, this function works as extended delay time.

On delay time = 25 ms + setting time

Off delay time = 30 ms + setting time

272 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

8. Special I/O Functions

8.3 High speed counter

8.3.1 Single phase up-counter

Function

When the count input is changed from OFF to ON, the count value is increased by 1.

When the count value reaches the set value, the count value is reset to 0, and I/O

interrupt program is activated (if the interrupt enable flag is ON). The count value is reset

to 0 when the reset input comes ON.

This counter operation is enabled while the soft-gate is ON. The count value is reset to 0

when the soft-gate is changed from ON to OFF.

The set value is set internally at the timing of the soft-gate changing from OFF to ON.

When the soft-gate is OFF, the count value can be changed by writing the data into the

set value register and setting the count preset flag to ON.

The count value range is H0000 to HFFFF (16-bit data).

Hardware condition

Count input (X000 and X001)

ON/OFF pulse width: 100 ms or more (max. 5 kHz)

Reset input (X002 and X003)

ON/OFF duration:

Related registers

SW16: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

2 ms or more

Function

Remarks

Channel 1

Channel 2

X001

Count input

X000

X002

SW18

SW22

S240

S241

S243

(Note)

Reset input

Set value

X003

SW20

SW23

S248

S249

S24B

Data range: H0000 to HFFFF

Count value

Soft-gate

Interrupt enable

Count preset

Operation is enabled when ON

Interrupt is enabled when ON

Used to preset the counter value

Note) When both channels are used, X000 to X003 cannot be used as normal

input devices. However, if either one channel is used, these inputs for unused

channel can be used as normal input devices.

Interrupt assignment

Channel 1 ¼ I/O interrupt program #1

Channel 2 ¼ I/O interrupt program #2

^{Basic Hardware and Function}273

8. Special I/O Functions

Operation

Count input

Reset input

Soft-gate

Set value

Count value

Interrupt

Sample program

(H1003)

In this example, 4099 (H1003) is set in SW16. As a result, the single phase up-counter

(channel 1 only) is selected.

When R010 comes ON, the data 2000 is written into the set value register (SW18).

While R010 is ON, the soft-gate (S240) and the interrupt enable flag (S241) are set to

ON to enable the counter operation.

The counter works as a ring counter with the set value 2000. The count value is stored in

SW22.

When R010 is OFF and R011 comes ON, the count value is preset to the data of D0100.

274 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

8. Special I/O Functions

8.3.2 Single phase speed-counter

Function

This function counts the number of changes of the count input from OFF to ON during the

every specified sampling time. The count value in a sampling time is stored in the hold

value register.

This counter operation is enabled while the soft-gate is ON. When the soft-gate is OFF,

the hold value is cleared to 0.

The setting range of the sampling time is 10 to 1000 ms (10 ms units).

The count value range is H0000 to HFFFF (16-bit).

Hardware condition

Count input (X000 and X001)

ON/OFF pulse width: 100 ms or more (max. 5 kHz)

Related registers

SW16: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

Function

Remarks

Channel 1

Channel 2

X001

SW20

SW23

S248

Count input

X000

SW18

SW22

S240

(Note 2)

Sampling time

Hold value

Soft-gate

Data range: 1 to 100 (Note 1)

Data range: H0000 to HFFFF

Operation is enabled when ON

Note 1) The setting data range of the sampling time is 1 to 100. (10 ms multiplier)

Note 2) When both channels are used, X000 and X001 cannot be used as normal

input devices. However, if either one channel is used, the input for unused

channel can be used as normal input devices.

Interrupt assignment

No interrupt function.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}275

8. Special I/O Functions

Operation

Count input

Sampling time

Soft-gate

Internal

count value

Hold value

Sample program

(H1403)

In this example, 5123 (H1403) is set in SW16. As a result, the single phase speed-

counter (channel 1 only) is selected.

The sampling time is set as 100 ms, because 10 is written in SW18.

While R010 is ON, the soft-gate (S240) is set to ON, and the speed-counter works.

The hold value is stored in SW22.

276 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

8. Special I/O Functions

8.3.3 Quadrature bi-pulse counter

Function

This function counts up or down the quadrature bi-pulse (2-phase pulses whose phases

are shifted 90° each other). Counts up when phase A precedes, and counts down when

phase B precedes. Both rising and falling edges of each phase are counted.

Consequently, 4 times count value against the pulse frequency is obtained.

Phase A

Phase B

Up count

Down count

When the count value reaches the comparison value 1 (or 2), the I/O interrupt program

#1 (or #2) is activated (if the interrupt enable flag for each is ON).

This counter operation is enabled while the soft-gate is ON. The count value is reset to 0

when the soft-gate is changed from ON to OFF. The count value is also reset to 0 when

the reset input comes ON.

When the soft-gate is OFF, the count value can be changed by writing the data into the

comparison value 1 (or 2) register and setting the count preset flag 1 (or 2) to ON.

The comparison value 1 and 2 can be changed even when the soft-gate is ON.

The count value range is -2147483648 to 2147483647 (32-bit data).

Hardware condition

Phase A and phase B (X000 and X001)

ON/OFF pulse width: 100 ms or more (max. 5 kHz)

Reset input (X002)

ON/OFF duration:

Related registers

SW16: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

2 ms or more

Function

Phase A

X000

Remarks

Phase B

X001

Reset input

X002

Comparison value 1

Comparison value 2

Count value

Data range: -2147483648 to 2147483647

SW19×SW18

SW21×SW20

SW23×SW22

S240

Soft-gate

Operation is enabled when ON

Interrupt 1 is enabled when ON

Used to preset the count value

Interrupt 2 is enabled when ON

Used to preset the count value

Interrupt enable 1

Count preset 1

Interrupt enable 2

Count preset 2

S241

S243

S249

S24B

^{Basic Hardware and Function}277

8. Special I/O Functions

Interrupt assignment

Comparison value 1 ¼ I/O interrupt program #1

Comparison value 2 ¼ I/O interrupt program #2

Operation

Up count

Down count

Reset input

Soft-gate

2147483647

Comparison

value 1

Count value

Comparison

value 2

-2147483648

Interrupt

1 1

278 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

8. Special I/O Functions

Sample program

(H0803)

In this example, 2051 (H0803) is set in SW16. As a result, the quadrature bi-pulse

counter is selected.

When R010 comes ON, the data 150000 is set into the comparison value 1 register

(SW19×SW18), and 200000 is set into the comparison value 2 register (SW21×SW20).

While R010 is ON, the soft-gate (S240), the interrupt enable flag 1 (S241) and the

interrupt enable flag 2 (S249) are set to ON to enable the counter operation.

The count value is stored in SW23×SW22.

When R010 is OFF and R011 comes ON, the count value is preset to the data of

D0101×D0100.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}279

8. Special I/O Functions

8.4 Interrupt input function

Function

When the signal state of the interrupt input is changed from OFF to ON (or ON to OFF),

the corresponding I/O interrupt program is activated immediately.

Up to 2 interrupt inputs can be used. The interrupt generation condition can be selected

either rising edge (OFF to ON) or falling edge (ON to OFF) for each input.

The I/O interrupt program #3 is corresponding to the interrupt input 1, and the I/O

interrupt program #4 is corresponding to the interrupt input 2.

Hardware condition

Interrupt input (X002 and X003)

ON/OFF pulse width: 100 ms or more

Related registers

SW16: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

Interrupt input 1

Interrupt input 2

X002

X003

Interrupt assignment

Interrupt input 1 ¼ I/O interrupt program #3

Interrupt input 2 ¼ I/O interrupt program #4

Operation

Interrupt input 1

Interrupt input 2

Interrupt

The above operation example is the case of rising edge setting for both inputs.

280 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

8. Special I/O Functions

Sample program

Main program

(H3045)

I/O interrupt program #3

Interrupt program A

I/O interrupt program #4

Interrupt program B

In this example, 12357 (H3045) is set in SW16. As a result, the interrupt input function (2

points, rising for both) is selected.

When X002 is changed from OFF to ON, the interrupt program A is executed. When

X003 is changed from OFF to ON, the interrupt program B is executed.

NOTE

Even if the Direct I/O instruction is used in the interrupt program, the

corresponding input state (X002 or X003) cannot be confirmed. Because the

interrupt is generated before internal updating of the input states.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}281

8. Special I/O Functions

8.5 Analog setting function

Function

The value of the analog setting adjuster is converted into a digital value (0 to 1000) and

stored in the SW register. 2 adjusters are provided. (V0 and V1)

The SW register data can be used as timer presets or any parameters for function

instructions.

Related registers

Function

Adjuster V0

Adjuster V1

SW30

SW31

Remarks

Data range: 0 to 1000

Operation

Decrease

Increase

SW30 (0 to 1000)

SW31 (0 to 1000)

Sample program

The above example is a simple flicker circuit of Y020. In this example, the ON/OFF

interval of Y020 can be controlled by the adjuster V0.

282 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

8. Special I/O Functions

8.6 Pulse output function

Function

This function is used to output a variable frequency pulse train. The controllable pulse

frequency is 50 to 5000 Hz (1 Hz units).

The output mode can be selected either CW/CCW or Pulse/Direction (PLS/DIR).

In the CW/CCW mode, CW pulse is output when the frequency setting is positive (50 to

5000), and CCW pulse is output when it is negative (-50 to -5000).

In the PLS/DIR mode, DIR is OFF when the frequency setting is positive (50 to 5000),

and DIR is ON when it is negative (-50 to -5000).

< CW/CCW mode >

CCW

< PLS/DIR mode >

PLS

DIR

In the both modes, pulse output is enabled when the pulse enable flag is ON. While the

pulse enable flag is ON, the pulse frequency can be changed by changing the frequency

setting value. However, the pulse direction (the sign of the frequency setting) cannot be

changed when the pulse enable flag is ON.

This function can be used to control the speed of a stepping motor, etc.

Related registers

SW26: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

Function

CW/CCW

CW pulse

device

Y020

Remarks

PLS/DIR

PLS

DIR

CCW pulse

Y021

Pulse enable flag

S270

Output is enabled when ON

Frequency setting register

Frequency setting error flag

SW28

S26F

Data range: -5000 to -50, 50 to 5000

ON at error (reset OFF automatically)

Note) The allowable value range of the frequency setting (SW28) is -5000 to -50 and

50 to 5000. If the value is out of this range or the sign is changed while the

pulse enable flag (S270) is ON, the frequency setting error flag (S26F) comes

ON. (Pulse output operation is continued with previous frequency setting)

^{Basic Hardware and Function}283

8. Special I/O Functions

Operation

Pulse enable

Frequency setting

100

-1000

-300

1000

1kHz

300

-100

Frequency

300Hz

100Hz

Pulse output

100Hz

300Hz

1kHz

Sample program

In this example, 3 (H0003) is set in SW26. As a result, the CW/CCW mode pulse output

function is selected.

When R000 is ON, the pulse output is started with the frequency designated by D0100.

If an invalid frequency is designated, the frequency setting error flag (S26F) comes ON

and the pulse enable flag (S270) is turned OFF. Then the pulse output is stopped.

284 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

8. Special I/O Functions

8.7 PWM output function

Function

This function is used to output a variable duty cycle pulse train. The controllable duty

cycle is 0 to 100 % (1 % units).

ON duty

PWM

50%

70%

60%

T = Pulse cycle

The PWM output is enabled when the pulse enable flag is ON. While the pulse enable

flag is ON, the duty cycle (ON duty) can be changed by changing the duty setting value (0

to 100).

The frequency setting is available in the range of 50 to 5000 Hz (1 Hz units) before

turning ON the pulse enable flag. The frequency changing is not allowed while the pulse

enable is ON.

Note that the minimum ON/OFF pulse duration is 100 ms. Therefore, the controllable ON

duty range is limited depending on the frequency setting as follows. If the ON duty setting

value is not available (within 0 to 100), the pulse width error flag comes ON. (PWM output

operation is continued but the duty cycle is not guaranteed)

Frequency

50 - 100 Hz

200 Hz

1000 Hz

5000 Hz

Cycle time

20 - 10 ms

5 ms

1 ms

200 ms

Available ON duty

0 to 100 %

0, 2 to 98, 100 %

0, 10 to 90, 100 %

0, 50, 100 %

Related registers

SW26: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

Function

device

Y020

Remarks

PWM pulse

Pulse enable flag

S270

Output is enabled when ON

Frequency setting register

ON duty setting register

Pulse width error flag

ON duty setting error flag

Frequency setting error flag

SW28

SW29

S26D

S26E

Data range: 50 to 5000

Data range: 0 to 100

ON at error (reset OFF automatically)

S26F

Note) If the setting value of SW28 or SW29 is out of the allowable range, the

frequency setting error flag (S26F) or the ON duty setting error flag (S26E)

comes ON. (PWM output operation is continued with previous ON duty setting)

^{Basic Hardware and Function}285

8. Special I/O Functions

Operation

Pulse enable

ON duty setting

70%

60%

ON duty

30%

20%

PWM output

10%

Sample program

In this example, 1 (H0001) is set in SW26 and 100 is set in SW28. As a result, 100 Hz

PWM output function is selected.

When R005 is ON, the PWM output is started with the duty cycle designated by D0200.

If an invalid ON duty is designated, the ON duty setting error flag (S26E) comes ON and

the pulse enable flag (S270) is turned OFF. Then the PWM output is stopped.

286 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

Section 9

Maintenance and Checks

9.1 Precautions during operation, 288

9.2 Daily checks, 289

9.3 Periodic checks, 290

9.4 Maintenance parts, 291

^{Basic Hardware and Function}287

9. Maintenance and Checks

9.1 Precautions during operation

When the T1/T1S is in operation, you should pay attention to the following items.

(1) The programmer cable can be plugged or unplugged while the T1/T1S is in

operation. When you try to do it, do not touch the connector pins. This may cause

malfunction of the T1/T1S owing to static electricity.

(2) Do not plug nor unplug the expansion cable during power on. This can cause

damage to the equipment. Furthermore, to avoid malfunction of the T1/T1S owing to

static electricity, do not touch the cable ends.

(3) Do not touch any terminals while the T1/T1S is in operation, even if the terminals are

not live parts. This may cause malfunction of the T1/T1S owing to static electricity.

(4) Do not touch the expansion connector pins while the T1/T1S is in operation. This

may cause malfunction of the T1/T1S owing to static electricity.

Fix the expansion connector cover if the expansion connector is not used.

(5) Do not insert your finger into the option card slot while the T1/T1S is in operation.

This may cause malfunction of the T1/T1S owing to static electricity.

Fix the option card slot cover securely.

(6) Do not insert your finger into the expansion rack’s ventilation hole during power on.

This may cause malfunction of the T1/T1S owing to static electricity.

288 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

9. Maintenance and Checks

9.2 Daily checks

1. Pay special attention during the maintenance work to minimize the risk of

electrical shock.

CAUTION

2. Turn off power immediately if the T1/T1S or related equipment is emitting

smoke or odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire or electrical

shock.

To maintain the system and to prevent troubles, check the following items on daily basis.

Item

Status LEDs

Check

Lit when internal 5 V is

normal.

Corrective measures

If the LEDs are not normal, see

10. Troubleshooting.

PWR

(power)

RUN

Lit when operating

normally.

FLT (fault)

Not lit when operating

normally.

Mode control

switch

Check that the mode control switch is in Turn this switch to R (RUN) side.

R (RUN) side. Normal operation is

performed when this switch is in R

(RUN) side.

Input LEDs

Lit when the corresponding input is ON.

· Check that the input terminal

screw is not loose.

· Check that the input terminal

block is not loose.

· Check that the input voltage is

within the specified range.

· Check that the output terminal

screw is not loose.

Output LEDs

Lit when the output is ON and the

corresponding load should operate.

· Check that the output terminal

block is not loose.

· Check that the output voltage is

within the specified range.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}289

9. Maintenance and Checks

9.3 Periodic checks

1. Pay special attention during the maintenance work to minimize the risk of

CAUTION

electrical shock.

2. Turn off power immediately if the T1/T1S or related equipment is emitting

smoke or odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire or electrical

shock.

Check the T1/T1S based on the following items every six months. Also perform checks

when the operating environment is changed.

Item

Power supply

Check

Measure the power voltage at the

T1/T1S’s power terminals.

Check that the terminal screw is not

loose.

Criteria

85 - 132/170 - 264 Vac (AC PS)

20.4 - 28.8 Vdc (DC PS)

Not loose

Check that the power cable is not

damaged.

Not damaged

Installation

condition

Check that the unit is installed securely. Not loose, no play

Check that the option card is inserted

securely. (if any)

Not loose, no play

Check that the expansion rack/unit is

installed securely. (if any)

Not loose, no play

Check that the expansion cable is

connected securely and the cable is not

damaged. (if any)

Not loose, not damaged

Check that the I/O module on the

expansion rack is inserted securely. (if

any)

Not loose, no play

Input/output

Measure the input/output voltage at the The voltage must be within the

T1/T1S’s terminals.

specified range.

Check the input status LEDs.

Check the output status LEDs.

The LED must light normally.

Check that the terminal block is installed Not loose, no play

securely.

Check that the terminal screw is not

loose and the terminal has a sufficient terminal

distance to the next terminal.

Not loose, not contacting the next

Check that the each I/O wire is not

damaged.

Not damaged

290 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

9. Maintenance and Checks

(Periodic checks - continued)

Item

Check

Criteria

Environment

Check that the temperature, humidity, Must be within the range of

vibration, dust, etc. are within the

specified range.

general specification.

Programming tool Check that the functions of the

programming tool are normal.

Monitoring and other operations

are available.

Check that the connector and cable are Not damaged

not damaged.

User program

Check that the T1/T1S program and the No compare error

master program (saved on a floppy disk,

etc.) are the same.

9.4 Maintenance parts

To recover from trouble quickly, it is recommended to keep the following spare parts.

Item

Quantity

Remarks

T1/T1S basic unit

Prepare at least one to minimize the down-time of

the controlled system.

Programming tool

Master program

Expansion rack or

unit (if any)

Useful for the troubleshooting procedure.

Saved on a floppy disk, etc.

As required

I/O module

One of each type used

(if any)

Fuse for I/O module One of each type used

(if any)

These spare parts should not be stored in high temperature and/or humidity locations.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}291

292 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

Section 10

Troubleshooting

10.1 Troubleshooting procedure, 294

10.2 Self-diagnostic items, 300

^{Basic Hardware and Function}293

10. Troubleshooting

10.1 Troubleshooting procedure

1. Pay special attention during the troubleshooting to minimize the risk of

CAUTION

electrical shock.

2. Turn off power immediately if the T1/T1S or related equipment is emitting

smoke or odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire or electrical

shock.

3. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal

blocks or wires. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage to

the T1 and related equipment.

4. Contact Toshiba for repairing if the T1/T1S or related equipment is failed.

Toshiba will not guarantee proper operation nor safety for unauthorized

repairing.

If a trouble occurs, determine whether the cause lies in the mechanical side or in the

control system (PLC) side. A problem may cause a secondary problem, therefore, try to

determine the cause of trouble by considering the whole system.

If the problem is found in the T1/T1S, check the following points:

PWR (power) LED

Follow the procedure in

10.1.1 Power supply check

Not lit

Lit

RUN LED

Lit

Follow the procedure in

10.1.2 CPU check

User program

Follow the procedure in

10.1.3 Program check

Not normal

Normal operation

Input operation

Normal operation

Output operation

Follow the procedure in

10.1.4 Input check

Not normal

Follow the procedure in

10.1.5 Output check

Also refer to section 10.1.6 for environmental problem.

294 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

10. Troubleshooting

10.1.1 Power supply check

If the PWR (power) LED is not lit after power on, check the following points.

Check the power connection

Correct

Connection terminals are correct.

The terminal screws are not loose.

The terminal block is installed securely.

Check the power voltage

at the T1/T1S’s terminal

85 to 132/170 to 264 Vac (50/60 Hz)

or 20.4 to 28.8 Vdc (DC power)

Normal

Remove the programmer

port connector

If the PWR LED becomes normal, the

internal 5 Vdc can be shorted in the

external connections of this port.

Still unlit

Remove the 24 Vdc service

power terminals if it is used

If the PWR LED becomes normal, the

24 Vdc service power can be over load.

Still unlit

Remove the option cards and

the expansion cable

If the PWR LED is still unlit, the T1/T1S

basic unit may be faulty. Replace the unit.

Lit

Confirm the internal 5 Vdc

current consumption if

The 5 Vdc capacity for option cards and

expansion rack/unit is 1 A.

option card, expansion rack

or expansion unit is used

(If the HP911A is connected, it requires

0.2 A, and if RS-485 port is used (T1S),

it requires 0.1 A)

Within the limit

Insert the removed option

cards one by one to pinpoint

the faulty card

Replace the faulty option card.

Normal

Connect the expansion rack

or unit again. For expansion

rack, insert the I/O modules

one by one to pinpoint the

faulty module

Replace the faulty I/O module or faulty

expansion rack/unit.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}295

10. Troubleshooting

10.1.2 CPU check

If the PWR (power) LED is lit but the RUN LED is not lit, check the following points.

Check the position of the

If it is not in R (RUN) position, turn the

switch to R (RUN) position.

mode control switch

Check the FLT (fault) LED

If the FLT LED is lit or blinking, the T1/T1S

is in the ERROR mode. Confirm the error

message by connecting the programming

tool. Refer to section 10.2.

Is the RUN LED blinking ?

If it is blinking, the T1/T1S is in the HOLD

mode. Check your program whether the

HOLD device (S401) is not used.

Connect the programming

tool, and check the T1/T1S’s

status

If the T1/T1S stays in HALT mode even

when the mode control switch is changed,

the switch may be faulty.

If the communication between the T1/T1S

and the programming tool is not possible,

the T1/T1S may be faulty.

10.1.3 Program check

Check the user program based on the following points if it is running but the operation

does not work as intended.

1. Whether duplicated coils are not programmed.

2. Whether a coil device and a destination of a function instruction are not overlapping.

3. Whether the ON/OFF duration of an external input signal is not shorter than the

T1/T1S’s scan time.

4. Whether a register/device which is used in the main program is not operated

erroneously in the interrupt program.

NOTE

When you write/modify the program, it is necessary to execute the EEPROM

write operation before turning off power to the T1. Otherwise the old program

stored in the built-in EEPROM will be over-written, and your program

modification will disappear.

296 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

10. Troubleshooting

10.1.4 Input check

If the program is running but the external input signal is not read normally, check the

following points:

Is the input status LED

changed ON/OFF according

to the corresponding input

device operation ?

If not, check the input voltage at the

T1/T1S’s input terminals.

If the voltage is not normal, check the input

device and the cable.

If the voltage is normal, the T1/T1S’s input

circuit may be faulty.

Yes

Connect the programming

tool, and monitor the

corresponding X device state

in RUN mode

If the monitored X device state is identical

to the state of the input status LED, the

cause may lie in the user program or in the

environment.

Not normal

Check whether the X device

is forced or not

If it is forced, release the force designation

then execute the EEPROM write

operation.

Not forced

Check whether the I/O

allocation table is identical to

the actual I/O configuration

If identical, the T1/T1S’s internal circuit or

the input circuit may be faulty.

Not identical

Execute the automatic I/O

allocation, and check whether

the I/O allocation table is now

identical to the actual I/O

configuration

If it becomes identical, execute the

EEPROM write operation.

Still not identical

Is the allocation mismatch for

a specific option card, I/O

module, or expansion unit ?

If so, the card, module or expansion unit

may be faulty. For expansion unit, check

the expansion cable also.

Is the allocation mismatch for

all I/O modules mounted on

the expansion rack ?

If so, check the connection between the

T1/T1S basic unit and the expansion rack.

If not, the T1/T1S basic unit may be faulty.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}297

10. Troubleshooting

10.1.5 Output check

If the output status monitored on the programming tool is normal but the external output

device (load) is not operated normally, check the following points:

Is the output status LED

changed ON/OFF according

to the program execution ?

Yes

Check the voltage between

the output terminal and its

common terminal.

It should be 0 V when the

output is ON, and it should

be the circuit voltage when

the output is OFF.

If it is the circuit voltage at the output is

ON, or if it is 0 V at the output is OFF with

the load ON, the T1/T1S’s output circuit

may be faulty.

If it is 0 V and the load is also OFF, check

the output power and the output cable

connections.

Normal

If it is not normal, check the output cable

connections.

Check the voltage at the load

If it is normal, check the specification of

the load, also check environmental factors.

Check whether the I/O

allocation table is identical to

the actual I/O configuration

If identical, the T1/T1S’s internal circuit or

the output circuit may be faulty.

Not identical

Execute the automatic I/O

allocation, and check whether

the I/O allocation table is now

identical to the actual I/O

configuration

If it becomes identical, execute the

EEPROM write operation.

Still not identical

Is the allocation mismatch for

a specific option card, I/O

module, or expansion unit ?

If so, the card, module or expansion unit

may be faulty. For expansion unit, check

the expansion cable also.

Is the allocation mismatch for

all I/O modules mounted on

the expansion rack ?

If so, check the connection between the

T1/T1S basic unit and the expansion rack.

If not, the T1/T1S basic unit may be faulty.

298 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

10. Troubleshooting

10.1.6 Environmental problem

If the following improper operations occur in the controlled system, check possible

environmental factors.

(1) If an improper operation occurs synchronously with the operation of I/O devices:

The noise generated at ON/OFF of the output device (load) may be the cause of the

problem. Take necessary measures mentioned in section 3.

(2) If an improper operation occurs synchronously with the operation of surrounding

equipment or high-frequency equipment:

The noise induced in I/O signal lines may be the cause of the problem. The surge

voltage, voltage fluctuations, or differences of grounding potentials may cause the

problem, depending on the power supply system or the grounding system.

Check the operation in accordance with the precautions in section 4. For some

cases, isolation from the ground may lead to the stable operation.

(3) If an improper operation occurs synchronously with the operation of machinery:

The vibration of the equipment may cause the problem. Check that the installation

status of the units and take necessary measures.

(4) If a similar failure is repeated after the unit is replaced:

Check that no metal debris or water drops has been entered into the unit/module.

Apart from the above points, consider climatic conditions. If the ambient temperature is

beyond the specified range, stable operation of the system is not guaranteed.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}299

10. Troubleshooting

10.2 Self-diagnostic items

If an error is detected by the self-diagnostic check of the T1/T1S CPU, the error

messages and the related information shown on the following pages will be recorded in

the T1/T1S’s event history table. If the error is severe and continuation of operation is not

possible, the T1/T1S turns OFF all outputs and stops the operation (ERROR mode).

The latest 15 error messages are stored in the event history table. This event history

table can be displayed on the programming tool. (Power ON/OFF is also registered)

If the T1/T1S has entered into ERROR mode, connect the programming tool to the

T1/T1S to confirm the error message in the event history table. This information is

important to recover from a trouble. For the key operations on the programming tool to

display the event history table, refer to the separate manual for the programming tool.

(An example of the event history)

< Event History>

Date

Time

Event

Count Info 1

Info 2

Info 3

Mode

1. 98-02-21

2. 98-02-21

3. 98-02-21

4. 98-01-15

5. 98-01-14

6. 98-01-14

16:48:01

15:55:26

12:03:34

09:27:12

19:11:43

10:39:11

I/O no answer

#00-04

RUN Down

INIT.

RUN

INIT.

HALT

System power on

System power off

System power on

System power off

No END/IRET error

M-001 H0024

HALT Down

In the event history table, No.1 message indicates the latest event recorded.

Each column shows the following information.

Date: The date when the error has detected (T1S only)

Time: The time when the error has detected (T1S only)

Event: Error message

Count: Number of times the error has detected by retry action

Info n: Related information to the error detected

Mode: T1/T1S’s operation mode in which the error has detected (INIT. means the

power-up initialization)

Down: Shows the T1/T1S has entered into ERROR mode by the error detected

If the T1/T1S is in the ERROR mode, operations to correct the program are not

accepted.

In this case, execute the Error reset operation by the programming tool to return the

HALT mode before starting the correction operation.

300 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

10. Troubleshooting

Error message and related information

Special

device

Meaning and countermeasures

Event

Info 1

Info 2

Info 3

Batt voltage drop

S00F In the power-up initialization, data invalidity of

RAM (back-up area) has been detected.

If retentive registers are used, these validity

are not guaranteed. (No error down)

The register of index modification is other

than RW, T, C and D. (Error down)

S064 The register designated by index modification

has exceeded the allowable range. That is,

out of RW, T, C and D.

Boundary error

Program Address FUN No.

type - in the

block No. block

(No error down)

Check the value of the index register.

S00A The data of built-in calendar LSI is illegal.

(No error down)

Clock-calendar error

Duplicate entry No.

Set the date and time. (T1S only)

Program Address Entry No.

Multiple SUBR instructions which have the

same subroutine number are programmed.

(Error down)

type -

in the

block No. block

Check the program.

EEPROM BCC error Illegal

BCC

S004 BCC error has been detected in the user

S013 program of the EEPROM. (Error down)

Reload the program and execute EEPROM

write operation again.

EEPROM warning

Number

of excess

writing

S007 The number of times of writing into EEPROM

has exceeded the life (100,000 times). (No

error down)

Replace the unit because the data reliability

of the EEPROM will decrease.

I/O bus error

I/O mismatch

Unit No. Data

S005 An abnormality has been detected in I/O bus

S020 checking. (Error down)

Check the expansion cable connection and

I/O module mounting status.

S005 The I/O allocation information and the actual

S021 I/O configuration are not identical.

(Error down)

Unit No. - Register

slot No. No.

Check the I/O allocation and the option card

mounting status.

I/O no answer

Unit No. - Register

slot No. No.

S005 No response from the T2 I/O module has

S022 been received. (Error down)

Check the I/O allocation, the expansion cable

connection and the T2 I/O module mounting

status.

I/O parity error

Illegal I/O reg

Unit No. - Register

slot No. No.

S005 I/O bus parity error has been detected in data

S023 read/write for T2 I/O modules. (Error down)

Check the expansion cable connection and

the T2 I/O module mounting status.

S005 The allocated I/O register address exceeds

S021 the limit, 32 words. (Error down)

Check the I/O allocation.

Unit No. - Register

slot No. No.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}301

10. Troubleshooting

Error message and related information

Event Info 1 Info 2

Illegal inst Program Address

type - in the

Special

device

Meaning and countermeasures

Info 3

S006 An illegal instruction has been detected in the

S030 program. (Error down)

S060 Reload the program and execute EEPROM

write operation again.

block No. block

Illegal sys intrpt

Invalid Fun inst

Invalid program

Interrupt Interrupt

address 1 address 2

Unregistered interrupt has occurred. (No

error down)

If the error occurs frequently, replace the unit.

A function instruction which is not supported

by the T1/T1S is programmed. (Error down)

Correct the program.

A basic ladder instruction which is not

supported by the T1/T1S is programmed.

(Error down)

Program Address Fun No.

type - in the

block No. block

Program

type -

block No.

Correct the program.

SUBR instruction is not programmed before

RET instruction. (Error down)

Correct the program.

An abnormality is detected in the program

management information. (Error down)

Reload the program and execute EEPROM

write operation again.

Loop nesting error

Memory full

Program Address

A FOR-NEXT loop is programmed inside

other FOR-NEXT loop. (Error down)

Correct the program.

The program exceeds the executable

memory capacity. (Error down)

Reduce the program steps.

type -

in the

block No. block

No END/IRET error

Program Address

The END instruction is not programmed in

the main program or in the sub-program.

(Error down)

type -

in the

block No. block

Correct the program.

The IRET instruction is not programmed in

the interrupt program. (Error down)

Correct the program.

No RET error

No sub-r entry

Program Address Sub-r No.

The RET instruction is not programmed in the

subroutine program. (Error down)

Correct the program.

The subroutine corresponding to CALL

instruction is not programmed. (Error down)

Correct the program.

type -

in the

block No. block

Program Address Sub-r No.

type -

in the

block No. block

302 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

10. Troubleshooting

Error message and related information

Special

device

Meaning and countermeasures

Event

Operand error

Info 1

Program Address

type - in the

Info 2

Info 3

A register/device which is not supported by

the T1/T1S is programmed. (Error down)

Correct the program.

block No. block

The timer or counter register is duplicated in

the program. (Error down)

Correct the program.

The subroutine number programmed with

CALL or SUBR instruction is out of the range.

(Error down)

T1 ...... 0 to 15

T1S .... 0 to 255

Correct the program.

Index modification is programmed for

instructions in which the index modification is

not allowed. (Error down)

Correct the program.

Pair inst error

Program Address

The combination is illegal for MCS-MCR,

JCS-JCR or FOR-NEXT instructions. (Error

down)

type -

in the

block No. block

Correct the program.

A MCS-MCR is programmed inside other

MCS-MCR segment. (Error down )

Correct the program.

A JCS-JCR is programmed inside other

JCS-JCR segment. (Error down )

Correct the program.

Peripheral LSI err

Program BCC error

RAM check error

Scan time over

Error

code

S004 CPU hardware error has been detected in the

S016 power-up initialization. (Error down and

programming tool cannot be connected)

Replace the unit if the error remains after

power OFF and ON again.

S006 BCC error has been detected in the user

S030 program in the RAM. (Error down)

If the error remains after power OFF and ON

again, reload the program and execute

EEPROM write operation.

S004 In the power-up initialization, an error has

S012 detected by RAM read/write checking. (Error

down)

Replace the unit if the error remains after

power OFF and ON again.

S006 The scan time has exceeded 200 ms. (Error

S031 down)

Illegal

BCC

Error

address

Error data Test data

Scan time

Correct the program to reduce the scan time

or use WDT instruction to extend the check

time.

^{Basic Hardware and Function}303

10. Troubleshooting

Error message and related information

Special

device

Meaning and countermeasures

Event

Info 1

Error

address

Info 2

Info 3

Sys RAM check err

Error data Test data

S004 In the power-up initialization, an error has

S011 detected by system RAM read/write

checking. (Error down and programming tool

cannot be connected)

Replace the unit if the error remains after

power OFF and ON again.

Sys ROM BCC error Illegal

BCC

S004 BCC error has been detected in the system

S010 program in the ROM. (Error down and

programming tool cannot be connected)

Replace the unit if the error remains after

power OFF and ON again.

System power off

System power on

Power OFF (no error)

Power ON (no error)

Sub-r nesting err

Program Address Sub-r No.

type - in the

T1:

CALL instruction is programmed in a

subroutine program. (Error down)

Correct the program.

block No. block

T1S:

The nesting of subroutines exceeds 3 levels.

(Error down)

Correct the program.

WD timer error

Address 1 Address 2

S004 The watchdog timer error has occurred.

S01F (Error down)

If the error occurs frequently, replace the unit.

304 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

Appendix

A.1 List of models and types, 306

A.2 Instruction index, 309

^{Basic Hardware and Function}305

Appendix

A.1 List of models and types

· Basic unit

Model

T1-16

Power supply

100 - 240 Vac

Input type

Dry contact

Type code

T1-MDR16

Part number

TDR116*6S

120 Vac

24 Vdc

120 Vac

24 Vdc

120 Vac

24 Vdc

120 Vac

24 Vdc

T1-MAR16

T1-MDR16D

T1-MDR28

T1-MAR28

T1-MDR28D

T1-MDR40

T1-MAR40

T1-MDR40D

T1-MDR40S

T1-MAR40S

T1-MDR40SD

TAR116*6S

TDR116*3S

TDR128*6S

TAR128*6S

TDR128*3S

TDR140*6S

TAR140*6S

TDR140*3S

TDR140S6S

TAR140S6S

TDR140S3S

24 Vdc

100 - 240 Vac

T1-28

T1-40

24 Vdc

100 - 240 Vac

24 Vdc

T1-40S 100 - 240 Vac

24 Vdc

· Option card

Description

16 points 24 Vdc input

16 points 24 Vdc output

8 points 24 Vdc input and 8 points 24 Vdc output

2 channels analog input, 0 - 5 V/0 - 20 mA

2 channels analog input, ±10 V

2 channels analog output, 0 - 20 mA

2 channels analog output, ±10 V

TOSLINE-F10 remote station

Type code

DI116

DO116

DD116

AD121

AD131

DA121

DA131

FR112

Part number

TDI116*BS

TDO116*BS

TDD116*BS

TAD121*BS

TAD131*BS

TDA121*BS

TDA131*BS

TFR112*BS

· Expansion unit

Description

Type code

Part number

16 points 24 Vdc input and 16 points relay output T1-EDR32

(with 0.5 m cable)

TDR132E*S

16 points 120 Vac input and 16 points relay output T1-EAR32

(with 0.5 m cable)

TAR132E*S

· Expansion rack

Description

Type code

Part number

2-slot for T2 I/O modules (with 0.15 m cable)

4-slot for T2 I/O modules (with 0.15 m cable)

BU152

BU154

TBU152**S

TBU154**S

306 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

Appendix

· T2 I/O modules

Description

16 points 24 Vdc/ac input

32 points 24 Vdc input

Type code

DI31

DI32

DI235

IN51

IN61

RO61

RO62

DO31

DO32

DO235

DO233P

AC61

AI21

Part number

EX10*MDI31

EX10*MDI32

TDI235**S

64 points 24 Vdc input

16 points 120 Vac input

16 points 240 Vac input

12 points relay output

8 points isolated relay output

16 points transistor output

32 points transistor output

64 points transistor output

16 points transistor output (current source)

12 points triac output

EX10*MIN51

EX10*MIN61

EX10*MRO61

EX10*MRO62

EX10*MDO31

EX10*MDO32

TDO235**S

TDO233P*S

EX10*MAC61

EX10*MAI21

EX10*MAI31

EX10*MAI22

EX10*MAI32

EX10*MAO31

4 channel

8-bit

4 - 20 mA / 1 - 5 V

analog input resolution 0 - 10 V

AI31

AI22

AI32

AO31

12-bit

4 - 20 mA / 1 - 5 V

resolution

8-bit

±10 V

4 - 20 mA / 1 - 5 V /

2 channel

analog

resolution 0 - 5 V / 0 - 10 V

output

12-bit

resolution

4 - 20 mA / 1 - 5 V

±10 V

AO22

AO32

PI21

EX10*MAO22

EX10*MAO32

EX10*MPI21

EX10*MMC11

TCF211**S

1 channel pulse input, 5/12 V, 100 kHz max.

1 axis position control, pulse output, 200 kHz max. MC11

Communication interface, 1 port of RS-232C CF211

· Peripherals

Description

Type code

HP911A

T-PDS

T-PDS Windows TMW33E1SS

RM102

CU111

Part number

THP911A*S

TMM33I1SS

Handy programmer (with 2 m cable for T1/T1S)

T-PDS software (MS-DOS version)

T-PDS software (Windows version)

Program storage module

TRM102**S

TCU111**S

Multi-drop adapter for computer link

^{Basic Hardware and Function}307

Appendix

· Cable and others

Description

T-PDS cable for T1/T1S, 5m length

HP911A cable for T1/T1S, 2m length (spare parts) CJ102

Type code

CJ105

Part number

TCJ105*CS

TCJ102*CS

RS-232C connector for computer link

(with 2 m cable)

Option card I/O connector for

DI116/DO116/DD116, soldering type

Option card I/O connector for

DI116/DO116/DD116, flat cable type

Expansion rack cable, 0.15 m (spare parts)

Empty slot cover for expansion rack

PT16S

PT15S

PT15F

CS1R2

TPT16S*AS

TPT15S*AS

TPT15F*AS

TCS1R2*CS

EX10*ABP1

308 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

Appendix

A.2 Instruction index

· Instruction name

1 bit rotate left 191

1 bit rotate right 190

1 bit shift left 183

Exclusive OR 176

Expanded data transfer 259

Flip-flop 233

1 bit shift right 182

2’s complement 250

7-segment decode 252

Absolute value 249

Addition 161

FOR 223

Forced coil 140

Function generator 247

Greater than 196

Greater than or equal 197

Hex to ASCII conversion 179

Increment 172

Addition with carry 167

AND 174

ASCII conversion 254

ASCII to Hex conversion 180

Average value 246

BCD conversion 256

Bi-directional shift register 188

Binary conversion 255

Bit count 220

Interrupt return 228

Invert coil 142

Invert transfer 156

Inverter 141

Jump control reset 152

Jump control set 152

Less than 200

Bit test 181

Calendar operation 236

Coil 139

Counter 150

Data exchange 157

Data transfer 154

Less than or equal 201

Lower limit 243

Master control reset 151

Master control set 151

Maximum value 244

Minimum value 245

Moving average 177

Multiplexer 194

Decode 219

Decrement 173

Demultiplexer 195

Multiplication 163

n bit rotate left 193

n bit rotate right 192

n bit shift left 185

n bit shift right 184

NC contact 136

Negative pulse coil 146

Negative pulse contact 144

NEXT 224

Device/register reset 215

Device/register set 214

Digital filter 178

Direct I/O 257

Disable interrupt 227

Division 164

Double-word 2’s complement 251

Double-word addition 165

Double-word data transfer 155

Double-word equal 204

Double-word greater than 202

Double-word greater than or equal 203

Double-word less than 206

Double-word less than or equal 207

Double-word not equal 205

Double-word subtraction 166

Enable interrupt 226

Encode 218

NO contact 135

Not equal 199

OFF delay timer 148

ON delay timer 147

OR 175

Positive pulse coil 145

Positive pulse contact 143

Pre-derivative real PID 237

Reset carry 217

Set calendar 235

Set carry 216

End 153

Equal 198

Shift register 186

^{Basic Hardware and Function}309

Appendix

Single shot timer 149

Special module data read 263

Special module data write 265

Step sequence initialize 230

Step sequence input 231

Step sequence output 232

Subroutine call 221

Subroutine entry 225

Subroutine return 222

Subtraction 162

Subtraction with carry 168

Table initialize 158

Table invert transfer 160

Table transfer 159

Transitional contact (falling) 138

Transitional contact (rising) 137

Unsigned division 170

Unsigned double/single division 171

Unsigned equal 210

Unsigned greater than 208

Unsigned greater than or equal 209

Unsigned less than 212

Unsigned less than or equal 213

Unsigned multiplication 169

Unsigned not equal 211

Up-down counter 234

Upper limit 242

Watchdog timer reset 229

310 ^{T1/T1S User’s Manual}

Appendix

· Instruction symbol

FG 247

U/D 234

U< 212

U<= 213

U<> 211

U= 210

U> 208

U>= 209

UL 242

* 163

+ 161

FOR 223

HTOA 179

I/O 257

IRET 228

JCR 152

JCS 152

LL 243

+1 172

+C 167

- 162

-1 173

-C 168

/ 164

< 200

<= 201

<> 199

= 198

> 196

>= 197

MAVE 177

MAX 244

MCR 151

MCS 151

MIN 245

MOV 154

MPX 194

NEG 250

NEXT 224

NOT 156

OR 175

PID3 237

RET 222

RST 215

RSTC 217

RTL 193

RTL1 191

RTR 192

RTR1 190

SET 214

SETC 216

SHL 185

SHL1 183

SHR 184

SHR1 182

SR 186

WDT 229

WRITE 265

XCHG 157

XFER 259

7SEG 252

ABS 249

AND 174

ASC 254

ATOH 180

AVE 246

BC 220

BCD 256

BIN 255

CALL 221

CLDN 235

CLDS 236

CNT 150

D+ 165

D- 166

D< 206

D<= 207

D<> 205

D= 204

D> 202

D>= 203

DEC 219

DFL 178

DI 227

DIV 171

DMOV 155

DNEG 251

DPX 195

DSR 188

EI 226

ENC 218

END 153

EOR 176

F/F 233

SS 149

STIN 231

STIZ 230

STOT 232

SUBR 225

TEST 181

TINZ 158

TMOV 159

TNOT 160

TOF 148

TON 147

U* 169

U/ 170

^{Basic Hardware and Function}311

Technicolor Thomson Camcorder VMD 22 User Manual
Timex Heart Rate Monitor M640 User Manual
Topcom Telephone 2000 C User Manual
TP Link Telephone TL SF1005D User Manual
Tricity Bendix Freezer TBUL 140 User Manual
Troy Bilt Tiller 12159 User Manual
Ulead DVD Player DVDMovieFactory User Manual
Uniden Cordless Telephone EXI 6960 User Manual
Univex Personal Computer 1654 User Manual
Vulcan Hart Range VEX User Manual